View / The Manual P1userm

User Manual: View / the Manual Productivity1000 User Manual and Inserts

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 252

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Manual Number: P1-USER-M

Notes:

~ WARNING ~
Thank you for purchasing automation equipment from Automationdirect.com®, doing business as,
AutomationDirect. We want your new automation equipment to operate safely. Anyone who installs or
uses this equipment should read this publication (and any other relevant publications) before installing or
operating the equipment.
To minimize the risk of potential safety problems, you should follow all applicable local and national
codes that regulate the installation and operation of your equipment. These codes vary from area to area
and usually change with time. It is your responsibility to determine which codes should be followed, and
to verify that the equipment, installation, and operation is in compliance with the latest revision of these
codes.
At a minimum, you should follow all applicable sections of the National Fire Code, National Electrical
Code, and the codes of the National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA). There may be local
regulatory or government offices that can also help determine which codes and standards are necessary for
safe installation and operation.
Equipment damage or serious injury to personnel can result from the failure to follow all applicable
codes and standards. We do not guarantee the products described in this publication are suitable for
your particular application, nor do we assume any responsibility for your product design, installation, or
operation.
Our products are not fault-tolerant and are not designed, manufactured or intended for use or resale as
on-line control equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail-safe performance, such as in the
operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or communication systems, air traffic control, direct life
support machines, or weapons systems, in which the failure of the product could lead directly to death,
personal injury, or severe physical or environmental damage (“High Risk Activities”). AutomationDirect
specifically disclaims any expressed or implied warranty of fitness for High Risk Activities.
For additional warranty and safety information, see the Terms and Conditions section of our catalog.
If you have any questions concerning the installation or operation of this equipment, or if you need
additional information, please call us at 770-844-4200.
This publication is based on information that was available at the time it was printed. At
AutomationDirect we constantly strive to improve our products and services, so we reserve the right to
make changes to the products and/or publications at any time without notice and without any obligation.
This publication may also discuss features that may not be available in certain revisions of the product.

Trademarks
This publication may contain references to products produced and/or offered by other companies. The
product and company names may be trademarked and are the sole property of their respective owners.
AutomationDirect disclaims any proprietary interest in the marks and names of others.
Copyright 2017, Automationdirect.com® Incorporated
All Rights Reserved

No part of this manual shall be copied, reproduced, or transmitted in any way without the prior, written
consent of Automationdirect.com® Incorporated. AutomationDirect retains the exclusive rights to all
information included in this document.

~ ADVERTENCIA ~
Gracias por comprar equipo de automatización de Automationdirect.com®. Deseamos que su nuevo equipo
de automatización opere de manera segura. Cualquier persona que instale o use este equipo debe leer esta
publicación (y cualquier otra publicación pertinente) antes de instalar u operar el equipo.
Para reducir al mínimo el riesgo debido a problemas de seguridad, debe seguir todos los códigos de seguridad
locales o nacionales aplicables que regulan la instalación y operación de su equipo. Estos códigos varian de
área en área y usualmente cambian con el tiempo. Es su responsabilidad determinar cuales códigos deben ser
seguidos y verificar que el equipo, instalación y operación estén en cumplimiento con la revisión mas reciente
de estos códigos.
Como mínimo, debe seguir las secciones aplicables del Código Nacional de Incendio, Código Nacional Eléctrico,
y los códigos de (NEMA) la Asociación Nacional de Fabricantes Eléctricos de USA. Puede haber oficinas de
normas locales o del gobierno que pueden ayudar a determinar cuales códigos y normas son necesarios para una
instalación y operación segura.
Si no se siguen todos los códigos y normas aplicables, puede resultar en daños al equipo o lesiones serias a
personas. No garantizamos los productos descritos en esta publicación para ser adecuados para su aplicación
en particular, ni asumimos ninguna responsabilidad por el diseño de su producto, la instalación u operación.
Nuestros productos no son tolerantes a fallas y no han sido diseñados, fabricados o intencionados para uso
o reventa como equipo de control en línea en ambientes peligrosos que requieren una ejecución sin fallas,
tales como operación en instalaciones nucleares, sistemas de navegación aérea, o de comunicación, control de
tráfico aéreo, máquinas de soporte de vida o sistemas de armamentos en las cuales la falla del producto puede
resultar directamente en muerte, heridas personales, o daños físicos o ambientales severos (“Actividades de Alto
Riesgo”). Automationdirect.com específicamente rechaza cualquier garantía ya sea expresada o implicada
para actividades de alto riesgo.
Para información adicional acerca de garantía e información de seguridad, vea la sección de Términos
y Condiciones de nuestro catálogo. Si tiene alguna pregunta sobre instalación u operación de este equipo, o
si necesita información adicional, por favor llámenos al número 770-844-4200 en Estados Unidos.
Esta publicación está basada en la información disponible al momento de impresión. En Automationdirect.
com nos esforzamos constantemente para mejorar nuestros productos y servicios, así que nos reservamos el
derecho de hacer cambios al producto y/o a las publicaciones en cualquier momento sin notificación y sin
ninguna obligación. Esta publicación también puede discutir características que no estén disponibles en ciertas
revisiones del producto.

Marcas Registradas
Esta publicación puede contener referencias a productos producidos y/u ofrecidos por otras compañías. Los nombres de las
compañías y productos pueden tener marcas registradas y son propiedad única de sus respectivos dueños. Automationdirect.com,
renuncia cualquier interés propietario en las marcas y nombres de otros.
PROPIEDAD LITERARIA 2017, AUTOMATIONDIRECT.COM® INCORPORATED
Todos los derechos reservados
No se permite copiar, reproducir, o transmitir de ninguna forma ninguna parte de este manual sin previo consentimiento por escrito
de Automationdirect.com® Incorprated. Automationdirect.com retiene los derechos exclusivos a toda la información incluida en
este documento. Los usuarios de este equipo pueden copiar este documento solamente para instalar, configurar y mantener el equipo
correspondiente. También las instituciones de enseñanza pueden usar este manual para propósitos educativos.

~ AVERTISSEMENT ~
Nous vous remercions d’avoir acheté l’équipement d’automatisation de Automationdirect.com®, en faisant des
affaires comme, AutomationDirect. Nous tenons à ce que votre nouvel équipement d’automatisation fonctionne en
toute sécurité. Toute personne qui installe ou utilise cet équipement doit lire la présente publication (et toutes les
autres publications pertinentes) avant de l’installer ou de l’utiliser.
Afin de réduire au minimum le risque d’éventuels problèmes de sécurité, vous devez respecter tous les codes locaux
et nationaux applicables régissant l’installation et le fonctionnement de votre équipement. Ces codes diffèrent d’une
région à l’autre et, habituellement, évoluent au fil du temps. Il vous incombe de déterminer les codes à respecter et
de vous assurer que l’équipement, l’installation et le fonctionnement sont conformes aux exigences de la version la
plus récente de ces codes.
Vous devez, à tout le moins, respecter toutes les sections applicables du Code national de prévention des incendies,
du Code national de l’électricité et des codes de la National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA). Des
organismes de réglementation ou des services gouvernementaux locaux peuvent également vous aider à déterminer
les codes ainsi que les normes à respecter pour assurer une installation et un fonctionnement sûrs.
L’omission de respecter la totalité des codes et des normes applicables peut entraîner des dommages à l’équipement
ou causer de graves blessures au personnel. Nous ne garantissons pas que les produits décrits dans cette publication
conviennent à votre application particulière et nous n’assumons aucune responsabilité à l’égard de la conception, de
l’installation ou du fonctionnement de votre produit.
Nos produits ne sont pas insensibles aux défaillances et ne sont ni conçus ni fabriqués pour l’utilisation ou la revente
en tant qu’équipement de commande en ligne dans des environnements dangereux nécessitant une sécurité absolue,
par exemple, l’exploitation d’installations nucléaires, les systèmes de navigation aérienne ou de communication, le
contrôle de la circulation aérienne, les équipements de survie ou les systèmes d’armes, pour lesquels la défaillance du
produit peut provoquer la mort, des blessures corporelles ou de graves dommages matériels ou environnementaux
(«activités à risque élevé»). La société AutomationDirect nie toute garantie expresse ou implicite d’aptitude à
l’emploi en ce qui a trait aux activités à risque élevé.
Pour des renseignements additionnels touchant la garantie et la sécurité, veuillez consulter la section Modalités et
conditions de notre documentation. Si vous avez des questions au sujet de l’installation ou du fonctionnement de cet
équipement, ou encore si vous avez besoin de renseignements supplémentaires, n’hésitez pas à nous téléphoner au
770-844-4200.
Cette publication s’appuie sur l’information qui était disponible au moment de l’impression. À la société
AutomationDirect, nous nous efforçons constamment d’améliorer nos produits et services. C’est pourquoi nous
nous réservons le droit d’apporter des modifications aux produits ou aux publications en tout temps, sans préavis ni
quelque obligation que ce soit. La présente publication peut aussi porter sur des caractéristiques susceptibles de ne
pas être offertes dans certaines versions révisées du produit.

Marques de commerce
La présente publication peut contenir des références à des produits fabriqués ou offerts par d’autres entreprises. Les
désignations des produits et des entreprises peuvent être des marques de commerce et appartiennent exclusivement à
leurs propriétaires respectifs. AutomationDirect nie tout intérêt dans les autres marques et désignations.
Copyright 2017, Automationdirect.com® Incorporated
Tous droits réservés

Nulle partie de ce manuel ne doit être copiée, reproduite ou transmise de quelque façon que ce soit sans le
consentement préalable écrit de la société Automationdirect.com® Incorporated. AutomationDirect conserve les
droits exclusifs à l’égard de tous les renseignements contenus dans le présent document.

Notes

Productivity1000 User Manual

Please include the Manual Number and the Manual Issue, both shown below,
when communicating with Technical Support regarding this publication.
Manual Number:

P1-USER-M

Issue:

1st Edition

Issue Date:

11/17
Publication History

Issue

Date

Description of Changes

1st Edition

11/17

Original

Notes

Table of Contents
Chapter 1: Getting Started
Introduction................................................................................................................ 1–2
Purpose of this Manual.............................................................................................. 1–2
About Getting Started............................................................................................... 1–2
Online Help Files and Other Documentation............................................................. 1–2
Technical Support..................................................................................................... 1–2
Conventions Used....................................................................................................... 1–3
Key Topics for Each Chapter...................................................................................... 1–3
Before you begin........................................................................................................ 1–4
Productivity Suite System Requirements................................................................... 1–5
Step 1: Install Programming Software...................................................................... 1–6
Step 2: Launch Programming Software................................................................... 1–11
Online Help............................................................................................................. 1–12
Step 3: Install Hardware........................................................................................... 1–13
Step 4: Apply Power to CPU.................................................................................... 1–17
Step 5: Establish PC to CPU Communications......................................................... 1–18
Step 6: Open/Read Hardware Configuration.......................................................... 1–19
Step 7: Create a Project............................................................................................ 1–21
Step 8: Save Project.................................................................................................. 1–27
Step 9: Write Project to CPU.................................................................................... 1–28
Step 10: Place CPU in RUN Mode............................................................................ 1–29
Step 11: Test the Project Using the Monitor Mode................................................ 1–30

Table of Contents

Chapter 2: Specifications
Overview..................................................................................................................... 2–2
CPU System:............................................................................................................. 2–2
P1-01AC Power Supply............................................................................................... 2–3
P1-01AC Specifications.............................................................................................. 2–4
Power Connections................................................................................................... 2–5
Productivity1000 CPU Module................................................................................... 2–7
P1-540 Specifications................................................................................................ 2–7
Battery (Optional)..................................................................................................... 2–9
Port Specifications................................................................................................... 2–10
MICRO USB IN Port................................................................................................. 2–10
Ethernet Port........................................................................................................... 2–11
Micro SD Slot.......................................................................................................... 2–12
RS-232 Port............................................................................................................. 2–13
RS-485 Port............................................................................................................. 2–14
I/O Modules Overview............................................................................................. 2–15
Discrete I/O Modules............................................................................................... 2–16
P1-08SIM Input Simulator....................................................................................... 2–18
P1-08ND3 DC Sinking/Sourcing Input.................................................................... 2–19
P1-08TD1 Sinking DC Output................................................................................. 2–22
P1-08TD2 Sourcing DC Output............................................................................... 2–25
P1-08TRS Isolated Relay Output.............................................................................. 2–28
P1-16TR Relay Output............................................................................................. 2–31
P1-15CDD1 Input/Output....................................................................................... 2–34
P1-15CDD2 Input/Output....................................................................................... 2–37
P1-16CDR Discrete Input/Relay Output................................................................... 2–40

Chapter 3: Analog I/O Specifications
Analog I/O Modules Overview................................................................................... 3–2
Analog I/O Modules................................................................................................... 3–3
P1-04ADL-1 Analog Input......................................................................................... 3–4
P1-04ADL-2 Analog Input......................................................................................... 3–8
P1-04THM Analog Input......................................................................................... 3–12
P1-04NTC Thermister.............................................................................................. 3–17

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Table of Contents
P1-04DAL-1 Analog Output.................................................................................... 3–21
P1-04DAL-2 Analog Output.................................................................................... 3–25

Chapter 4: Specialty Module Specifications
Left Blank For Future Use

Chapter 5: Installation and Wiring
Safety Guidelines........................................................................................................ 5–2
Plan for Safety........................................................................................................... 5–2
Three Levels of Protection......................................................................................... 5–3
Orderly System Shutdown......................................................................................... 5–3
System Power Disconnect......................................................................................... 5–3
Emergency Stop Circuits .......................................................................................... 5–4
Introduction to the Productivity1000 Mechanical Design........................................ 5–5
Dimensions and Installation....................................................................................... 5–6
Mounting Guidelines.................................................................................................. 5–9
Enclosures................................................................................................................. 5–9
Mounting Position..................................................................................................... 5–9
Grounding................................................................................................................ 5–9
Mounting Clearances.............................................................................................. 5–10
Temperature Considerations.................................................................................... 5–10
Power Considerations.............................................................................................. 5–10
Agency Approvals.................................................................................................... 5–11
Using Mounting Rails.............................................................................................. 5–11
Installing the Power Supply..................................................................................... 5–12
Installing the I/O Modules....................................................................................... 5–14
Wiring Guidelines..................................................................................................... 5–15
Wiring to the Power Supply.................................................................................... 5–15
Grounding.............................................................................................................. 5–15
Fuse Protection........................................................................................................ 5–16

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

iii

Table of Contents
I/O Modules Wiring Options.................................................................................... 5–17
Hand Wiring System................................................................................................ 5–17
ZIPLink Wiring System............................................................................................ 5–18
Removable Terminal Blocks (Optional).................................................................... 5–20
Planning the I/O Wiring Routes............................................................................... 5–22
System Wiring Strategies......................................................................................... 5–23
CPU Isolation Boundaries........................................................................................ 5–23
Sinking/Sourcing Concepts..................................................................................... 5–24
I/O “Common Terminal” Concepts......................................................................... 5–25
DC Input Wiring Methods....................................................................................... 5–26
DC Output Wiring Methods.................................................................................... 5–26
Relay Outputs - Wiring Methods............................................................................. 5–28
Relay Outputs – Transient Suppression for Inductive Loads in a Control System...... 5–29

Chapter 6: PLC Communications
Communications: Capabilities.................................................................................... 6-1
Communication Ports................................................................................................ 6-1
Communications: Connectivity.................................................................................. 6-7
P1-540 Port Connections.......................................................................................... 6-7
ASCII and Custom Protocol Functionality............................................................ 6-12
ASCII Instructions.................................................................................................... 6-12
Custom Protocol Instructions.................................................................................. 6-13
Communications: Ethernet....................................................................................... 6-15
TCP and UDP Port Numbers................................................................................... 6-15
IP Addressing and Subnetting................................................................................. 6-15
PC Setup................................................................................................................. 6-16
CPU Setup............................................................................................................... 6-17
TCP Connection Behavior with Modbus TCP and Network Instructions.................. 6-18
Communications Modbus Functionality.................................................................. 6-19
Master/Client Function Code and Data Type Support............................................. 6-19
Slave/Server Function Code and Data Type Support............................................... 6-21
Assigning Modbus Addresses to Tags...................................................................... 6-22
Modbus Options..................................................................................................... 6-25
Modbus Instructions................................................................................................ 6-28

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Table of Contents
Network Instructions............................................................................................... 6-30
Automatic Poll versus Manual Polling and Interlocking............................................ 6-31
Message Queue....................................................................................................... 6-33
EtherNet/IP for the Productivity Series................................................................... 6-34
Terminology Definitions.......................................................................................... 6-34
Network Layer Chart............................................................................................... 6-35
EtherNet/IP Data..................................................................................................... 6-35
Class 1 and Class 3 Connections............................................................................. 6-36
Setup Example: Productivity1000 as EtherNet/IP Adapter....................................... 6-36
Setup Example: Productivity1000 as EtherNet/IP Scanner....................................... 6-39
Troubleshooting Tips............................................................................................... 6-42
ProNET ................................................................................................................... 6-45
Custom Protocol Over Ethernet............................................................................... 6-47
Communications: Port Configuration...................................................................... 6-49
Ethernet Configuration............................................................................................ 6-49
External Ethernet Port Settings................................................................................ 6-50
Local Ethernet Port Settings.................................................................................... 6-51
Remote Access Configuration.................................................................................. 6-51
Serial Configuration................................................................................................. 6-52
RS-232 and RS-485 Port Settings............................................................................. 6-52
Communications: Error Codes................................................................................. 6-55
Productivity1000 Communication Error Codes........................................................ 6-55
Productivity1000 EtherNet/IP Error Codes.............................................................. 6-56

Chapter 7: Maintenance & Troubleshooting
Hardware Maintenance.............................................................................................. 7–2
Diagnostics.................................................................................................................. 7–3
CPU Functions Indicators........................................................................................... 7–4
PWR Indicator............................................................................................................. 7–5
RUN Indicator............................................................................................................. 7–7
CPU Indicator.............................................................................................................. 7–7
Communications Problems........................................................................................ 7–7
I/O Module Troubleshooting..................................................................................... 7–8

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Table of Contents
Noise Troubleshooting............................................................................................. 7–10
Run Time vs. Stop Transfer Instruction................................................................... 7–11
Forcing I/O Points.................................................................................................... 7–14

Appendix A: European Union Directives (CE)
European Union Directives.........................................................................................A–2
Member Countries....................................................................................................A–2
Applicable Directives.................................................................................................A–2
Compliance...............................................................................................................A–2
General Safety...........................................................................................................A–4
Special Installation Manual........................................................................................A–4
Other Sources of Information....................................................................................A–4
Basic EMC Installation Guidelines..............................................................................A–5
Enclosures.................................................................................................................A–4
Mains Filters..............................................................................................................A–5
Suppression and Fusing.............................................................................................A–5
Internal Enclosure Grounding....................................................................................A–5
Equipotential Grounding...........................................................................................A–5
Communications and Shielded Cables......................................................................A–6
Analog and RS232 Cables.........................................................................................A–7
Multidrop Cables.......................................................................................................A–7
Shielded Cables Within Enclosures............................................................................A–7
Analog Modules and RF Interference.........................................................................A–7
Network Isolation......................................................................................................A–8
Items Specific to the Productivity1000......................................................................A–9

Appendix B: Productivity1000 Error Codes
Communications Error Codes.................................................................................... B–2
Module Error Codes.................................................................................................. B–3
CPU Error Codes....................................................................................................... B–4
Project Error Codes.................................................................................................... B–5
Project Error Messages.............................................................................................. B–7

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Getting Started

Chapter

In This Chapter...
Introduction................................................................................................................ 1–2
Purpose of this Manual.............................................................................................. 1–2
About Getting Started............................................................................................... 1–2
Online Help Files and Other Documentation............................................................. 1–2
Technical Support..................................................................................................... 1–2
Conventions Used....................................................................................................... 1–3
Key Topics for Each Chapter...................................................................................... 1–3
Before you begin........................................................................................................ 1–4
Productivity Suite System Requirements................................................................... 1–5
Step 1: Install Programming Software...................................................................... 1–6
Step 2: Launch Programming Software................................................................... 1–11
Online Help............................................................................................................. 1–12
Step 3: Install Hardware........................................................................................... 1–13
Step 4: Apply Power to CPU.................................................................................... 1–17
Step 5: Establish PC to CPU Communications......................................................... 1–18
Step 6: Open/Read Hardware Configuration.......................................................... 1–19
Step 7: Create a Project............................................................................................ 1–21
Step 8: Save Project.................................................................................................. 1–27
Step 9: Write Project to CPU.................................................................................... 1–28
Step 10: Place CPU in RUN Mode............................................................................ 1–29
Step 11: Test the Project Using the Monitor Mode................................................ 1–30

Chapter 1: Getting Started

Introduction

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Purpose of this Manual
Thank you for purchasing the AutomationDirect Productivity1000 Programmable Controller
(CPU) family of products. This hardware user manual provides information that will help
you install, set up, program, troubleshoot, and maintain your Productivity1000 CPU system.
The manual includes information that is critical to the safety of the personnel who will install
and use the controller and to the machinery, processes, and equipment controlled by the
CPU.
The manual also includes important information about power and signal wiring, mounting of
the CPU, and configuring the CPU system.

About Getting Started
If you are familiar with Programmable Controllers in general, then following the simple steps
in this first chapter may be all you require to start being productive using a Productivity1000
CPU system. After you have completed the steps, your Productivity1000 controller will be
running the ladder logic project that you programmed.

Online Help Files and Other Documentation
The Productivity1000 programming software, Productivity Suite, is available as a download
from our website.
See http://www.automationdirect.com/products/pseries.html.
The Productivity Suite software includes searchable online help topics covering all aspects of
the software, instruction set, module setup, and communications.
In addition, each power supply, CPU, and I/O module includes an installation insert.

Technical Support
We strive to make our manuals the best in the industry. We rely on your feedback to let
us know if we are reaching our goal. If you cannot find the solution to your particular
application, or if for any reason you need technical assistance, please call us at:
1–770–844–4200
Our technical support group will work with you to answer your questions. They are available
Monday through Friday from 9:00 A.M. to 6:00 P.M. Eastern Time. We also encourage you
to visit our web site where you can find information about our company and specific technical
information about a wide array of our products.
http://www.automationdirect.com

1–2

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 1: Getting Started

Conventions Used
When you see the “note pad” icon in the left-hand margin, the paragraph to its immediate right will be a
special note. Notes represent information that may make your work quicker or more efficient. The word
NOTE: in boldface will mark the beginning of the text.

When you see the “exclamation point” icon in the left-hand margin, the paragraph to its immediate right
will be a warning. This information could prevent injury, loss of property, or even death in extreme
cases. Any warning in this manual should be regarded as critical information that should be read in its
entirety. The word WARNING in boldface will mark the beginning of the text.

Key Topics for Each Chapter
The beginning of each chapter will list the key
topics that can be found in that chapter.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

1–3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 1: Getting Started

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Before you begin...
It is recommended that the following items be available to make this short step-by-step
introduction to the Productivity1000 System go smoothly.
Productivity1000 System Example

P1-01AC Power Supply

P1-540 CPU Module
Analog Input Modules

P1-08TRS Output Module

Output Modules

PC Running
Windows 7, 8, 8.1 & 10

Productivity Suite
Programming Software
PS-PGMSW

Not available from
Automationdirect.com

USB-A to Micro USB-B
Programming Cable

Download software from our website
at: www.automationdirect.com under
“Programmable Controllers”.

AC Power Cord
Screwdriver
TW-SD-MSL-1

Wire Strippers
DN-WS

Hookup Wire

Not available from
Automationdirect.com.

1–4

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 1: Getting Started

Productivity Suite System Requirements
Productivity Suite Windows-based programming software (CD-ROM or web download) works
with Windows 10 or Windows® 8 or 8.1 (Home or Professional), or Windows 7 (Home,
Professional, Ultimate, 32 or 64-bit) or Vista® (Home, Basic, Premium, 32 or 64-bit). Please
check the following requirements when choosing your PC configuration:
• Vista or Windows 7 or later Personal Computer with a Windows 10 or Windows 8,
8.1 OS. Personal Computer (Windows Vista) with an 800 MHz or (Windows 7 &
higher) 1GHz processor (CPU) clock speed recommended; Intel Pentium/Celeron
family or AMD K6/Athlon/Duron family, or compatible processor recommended.
•

SVGA 1024x768 pixels resolution (1280 x 1024 pixels resolution recommended).

•

300MB free hard-disk space.

• RAM: Vista or Windows 7 & higher with GUI version 3.0.0.x or higher RAM = 2GB
memory (4GB recommended).
**GUI version 1.10 or lower RAM = 512MB free RAM (1GB recommended).
•

CD-ROM or DVD drive for installing software from the CD.

•

USB or Ethernet Port for project transfer to CPU.

NOTE: USB or Ethernet cable is also required for communications between PC and CPU.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

1–5

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 1: Getting Started

Step 1: Install Programming Software

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

1. D
ownload the latest version of the Productivity Suite Programming Software from the
Automationdirect website.
Or, if the Productivity Suite Programming Software CD is available, insert it into your PC CD
drive. The install dialog box should appear after a short time.
2. Click on the Start menu icon (bottom left corner of screen), and select Run or for Windows 7
users, type “run” in the search field to locate this application.
• Type the following in the Open text field: D: install.exe, where D: is the drive letter of the
CD drive being used, or browse to the location of the “install.exe” file that was downloaded and
selected this file.
• Select OK and follow the dialog boxes shown throughout the next pages.
NOTE: See the Productivity Suite Installation and Productivity Suite Startup topics for additional details if
needed.

3. T
he “InstallAnywhere” pop-up (shown below) will appear briefly while the software is
preparing to install.

• The progress pop-up (shown below) will appear while the software is setting up the directory.

1–6

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 1: Getting Started
4. C
arefully read the software license agreement. If you agree to the terms and conditions of
this agreement, select the “I accept the terms of the License Agreement” and then the “Next”
button.

5. T
he “Choose Install Folder” window will open next. If this is the first installation of the
Productivity Suite Software on your PC, choose
(a) Install New Instance: This option will install a new instance of the Productivity Suite
software in the default location, C:\Program Files\AutomationDirect\Productivity Suite
; or choose a different one using the Browse button.

If the installer detects a previous version of Productivity Suite on your PC, there is another option
available with this window:
(b) Replace Existing Instance: This option allows you to uninstall the previous version
of the software and install the new version in its place. If this option is chosen the
following window appears. Click “Uninstall” to continue.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

1–7

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 1: Getting Started
6. O
nce you have selected the install folder and whether or not to delete any previous
instances, the “Choose Shortcuts” window will appear. If a Shortcut Icon is desired for
the software select the location where the icon will be created. The default location is
“On the Desktop”. Once all selections have been made, click “Install” to begin the installation.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
1–8

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 1: Getting Started
A status window will appear displaying the status of the installation.

7. T
he next screen to appear contains the Release Notes for this version of the Productivity Suite
software. This is an opportunity to review the software version release notes. You may read
these before selecting the “Next” button.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

1–9

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 1: Getting Started
8. The Installation is now complete. Select “Done”.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
1–10

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 1: Getting Started

Step 2: Launch Programming Software
After installing the Productivity Suite Programming Software, PS-PGMSW, launch the software
by double clicking the desktop Productivity Suite Icon. Or from the PC’s ‘Start’ menu, slide
the mouse pointer through the menus (start>All Programs>AutomationDirect>Productivity
Suite x.x.x.x>Productivity Suite) to the Productivity Suite Programming Software selection,
and use the left mouse button to click on it.

The Productivity Suite Programming Software will start up and display the Main Window as
shown here.
NOTE: The recommended minimum screen size for the Productivity Suite Software is 1024 X 786 pixels.

Click on the ‘Start a New Project’ in the Start Productivity dialog box to open a programming
window.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

1–11

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 1: Getting Started

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

The Programming Window is divided into menus and toolbars that work together to make
project development as simple as possible.

Online Help
It is essential that you use the Productivity Suite online Help to familiarize yourself with the
software. Keep it open on your desktop and refer to it frequently as you build your system.
Click on the toolbar Help button to open the Help file.

1–12

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 1: Getting Started

Step 3: Install Hardware
The Productivity1000 CPU system components snap together to form a configured CPU
in minutes. See Chapter 5, Installation and Wiring, for more detailed hardware installation
information. What follows are the basic steps:
1. Connect power supply to CPU.
Align Power Supply
Connector and pilot
pins slide onto
P1 CPU module.

Remove Optional
Power Connector

Optionalmust
Power be
Connector
mustbefore
be Removed
NOTE: Optional Power Connector
removed
connecting P1-01AC Power Supply. This
before P1-01AC Power Supply may be installed
precludes connection of two separate power supplies.

2. OR using an alternate power source connect directly to CPU Optional Power Connector
terminals.

G
0V
24VDC

Use ADC
Part # S5062-R

G
0V
24VDC

1000

G
0V
Hardware
24VDC

User Manual, 1st Edition

1–13

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 1: Getting Started

or remove
modules
G: Do not add
3. Install
I/O Modules
and engagewith
locking tabs.
applied.
1 Step One:

e:2With latch
position,
3 align
on the side of
le4and stack
ng5 together.
ates lock is
6
7
8 Step Two:
9
o: Attach field wiring using
10terminal block or ZIPLink
ble
m.
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
ree:
D To unstack modules, pull
With latch in “locked” position, align
connectors on the side of each module
and stack by pressing together. An
audible click indicates lock is engaged.

To unstack modules, pull locking latch up
into the unlocked position and then pull
modules apart.

WARNING: Explosion hazard – Do not connect, disconnect
modules or operate switches while circuit is live.
Productivity1000 System does not support Hot Swapping!

secure after modules
are connected.

P1-08TD1

WIRE STRIP
LENGTH
MAX
MIN

h up into the unlocked position
ll modules apart.

1–14

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 1: Getting Started
4. Connect appropriate wiring to the power supply (P1-01AC) and I/O (P1-08TRS module) in
this example.

Power
Hookup
P1-01AC
P1 -01A C
®

100-240V 48V A
50-60Hz
125VDC, 20W

AC (L)
DC (+V)
AC (N)
DC (-V)
G
LG

125VDC

100–240 VAC
AC (L)

DC (+V)

AC (N)

DC (-V)

GND

GND
LOGIC

LOGIC
GND

GND

The power supply and load

Grounding are connected through an DC
or AC current source.

A good common ground reference (earth ground) is essential for proper operation of
the Productivity1000 system. One side of all control circuits, power circuits and the
ground lead must be properly connected to earth ground by either installing a ground
rod in close proximity to the enclosure or by connecting to the incoming power system
ground. There must be a single-point ground (i.e. copper bus bar) for all devices in the
enclosure that require an earth ground.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

1–15

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 1: Getting Started

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

5. C
onnect USB cable. Use a Micro USB cable with a Type A and Micro Type B connectors as
shown below.

1–16

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 1: Getting Started

Step 4: Apply Power to CPU
Ensure proper wiring and the correct voltage is available before connecting wiring to the power
supply. Once this is verified, connect power to the power supply. Once power is applied, the
CPU will perform a self evaluation and verification. See Chapters 2 and 5 of this manual for
more power supply and input wiring information.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

1–17

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 1: Getting Started

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Step 5: Establish PC to CPU Communications
Select “Choose CPU” icon on the CPU Toolbar and the dialog box shown below will appear.
Highlight the installed CPU listed in the dialog box and select “Connect”.

When initially going Online with the CPU, a pop-up window will notify you of a project
difference between the CPU and the PC. Select “No, Use PC Project” command button.

1–18

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 1: Getting Started

Step 6: Open/Read Hardware Configuration
Before we create a project we must configure the hardware so we’ll have default input and output
tags for use in our project. With the CPU in “STOP” Mode, select Hardware Configuration
under Application Tools and the following screen opens.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

1–19

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 1: Getting Started
This screen shows the user tag names for all eight I/O points. Select “OK”.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
1–20

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 1: Getting Started

Step 7: Create a Project
We’re going to start by entering a simple ladder logic program in the order that follows.
Rung #1
Select the “END” position on Rung #1 with your cursor. From the Instruction List on the
right, scroll down to Counters/Timers section and double click on the Simple Timer (STMR)
instruction. The “Simple Timer” instruction automatically is placed on the selected rung and
the Simple Timer (STMR) dialog box pops up.
1. Enter ‘T1_SP’ into the Preset Value field.
2. Enter ‘T1_CURVAL’ into the Current Value field.
3. Enter ‘T1_DN’ into the Done field.

4. Select “OK”.
The Define Tags dialog box opens. Select OK.
5. Enter preset time value of 300ms into “Initial Value” field for Tag T1_SP.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

1–21

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 1: Getting Started
Place the cursor on the first position on Rung #1 as shown below. In the Instruction List
on the right, scroll up to Contacts section and double click on “NO Contact (NO)”. A NO
Contact (NO) is placed at this rung position and a dialog box pops up.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

1. Enter ‘T1_Start’ into the text box.
2. Select OK.

The Define Tags dialog box opens. Select “OK”.

1–22

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 1: Getting Started
With the cursor on Rung #1, to the right of contact ‘T1_Start’, we are going to begin drawing
a branch circuit. Under the Edit drop down menu, select “Wire”, then select “Down”. Notice
that a wire has been added.

NOTE: There is also a wire Erase With Cursor tool in the Edit drop down menu that is used to erase any
lines that were created using the Wire tools.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

1–23

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 1: Getting Started
Next we’ll draw a wire to the left. Under the Edit drop down menu, select “Wire”, then select
“Left”.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Next we’ll add another normally-open contact. Place the box cursor on the first position on the
newly created SubRung #1. From the Instruction List click & drag a Contact (NO) into this
box. A NO Contact (NO) dialog box pops up.
1. Enter ‘T1_Manual’ into the field.
2. Select “OK”.

The Define Tags dialog box opens. Select “OK”.

1–24

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 1: Getting Started
Rung #2
Next we’ll add another normally-open contact at the start of Rung #2. Click & drag a “NO
Contact (NO)” into this box. A NO Contact (NO) dialog box pops up.
1. In the empty tag field press the down arrow on the right to open a drop-down list; scroll down
and select ‘T1_DN’.
2. Select “OK”.

Next we’ll add an Out coil at the end of the rung. Place the cursor at the end of the rung.
From the Instructions list Coil section, double click on an “Out Coil (OUT)”. An Out Coil
(OUT) is placed on the rung and a dialog box pops up.
1. In the tag field press the down arrow on the right to open a drop-down list; scroll down and select
‘DO-0.1.2.1’.
2. Select OK.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

1–25

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 1: Getting Started
The ladder program now looks like this. When either of the T1 contacts are energized, the
timer starts. When it times out, contact T1_DN energizes and turns on the rung 2 output.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
1–26

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 1: Getting Started

Step 8: Save Project

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Save the project by opening the File drop-down menu and selecting Save Project.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

1–27

Chapter 1: Getting Started

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Step 9: Write Project to CPU
Next we will transfer the project to the CPU. Transfer Project is accessed by selecting Transfer
Project from the File Menu.
Select “To CPU” from the Transfer Project menu.
The project will then be Transferred to the CPU from the PC. During the transfer a status

window will open displaying the process.

1–28

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 1: Getting Started

Step 10: Place CPU in RUN Mode
Next, verify the Run/Stop switch on the CPU faceplate is placed in the Run position and
then place the CPU in RUN mode on the Productivity Software Toolbar so the ladder logic
program executes.

NOTE: If the Run/Stop switch on the CPU is in the Stop position, the Run button on the Programming
Software Toolbar will be disabled.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

1–29

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 1: Getting Started

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Step 11: Test the Project Using Monitor Mode
In this next step, use the Monitor Mode and Data View to test the ladder logic program. Select
Monitor Mode from the top of the Ladder Logic screen to display the status of Boolean and
Integer Tags.

Using Data View, the Tag values can be viewed or manipulated for testing the project. The
Data View window can be accessed by selecting Data View from the Tools Menu of the Main
Menu.
For the Simple Timer Instruction, a Monitor button is provided that, when selected, will load
the tags associated with the instruction into Data View.

1–30

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 1: Getting Started
The tags will be placed in a separate Tab titled New Task - STMR as seen below.

The remaining tagnames in the Ladder Logic can be added to the Data View window by
clicking on a blank area in the Tagname column. This will display a drop down menu where
the tags can be selected. Scroll down the list and select the tags to be added.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

1–31

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 1: Getting Started
Once all of the tagnames have been added, they can now be monitored and manipulated. See
the Data View help file topic for additional details if needed.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

NOTE: Force must be enabled for a Tag in the Tag Database before Force can be used in Data View.

1–32

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Specifications
In This Chapter...

Chapter

Overview..................................................................................................................... 2–2
P1-01AC Power Supply............................................................................................... 2–3
Productivity1000 CPU Module................................................................................... 2–7
I/O Modules Overview............................................................................................. 2–15
Discrete I/O Modules............................................................................................... 2–16

Chapter 2: Specifications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Overview
Hardware
The Productivity1000 system of components is designed to combine practical PLC
features in a compact and expandable design, with a simple-to-use philosophy. A powerful
Productivity1000 PLC can be expanded with the addition of easily connected I/O modules.
The Productivity1000 PLC system does not require a mounting base. The Productivity1000
PLC and I/O modules are connected together via an expansion port on the right side of the
PLC case. A variety of I/O modules are available for flexible and optimal system configuration.
The Productivity1000 PLC is supported by the robust and powerful Productivity Suite
programming software; designed with an easy-to-use instruction set that covers all applications
suitable for this class of PLC. The CPU stores and executes the user designed program.

2–2

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 2: Specifications

P1-01AC Power Supply
The P1-01AC power supply module requires power from an external 120–240 VAC or
125VDC source. When the power supply is connected to the P1-540 CPU, it will provide
required power to the Productivity1000 CPU.

No Power Budgeting
Any combination of I/O modules may be installed in any slot without power budget
considerations.

P1-01AC
®

100-240V 48VA
50-60Hz
125VDC, 20W

AC (L)
DC (+V)
AC (N)
DC (-V)
G
LG

P1-01AC

Terminal Block Specifications
Number of positions

4 screw terminals

Wire Range

22–12 AWG (0.324 to 3.31 mm²)
Solid / Stranded conductor
3/64 in (1.2 mm) Insulation Max.
1/4 in (6–7 mm) Strip Length

Conductors

Use copper conductors, 75°C or equivalent

Screw Driver

1/4 in (6.5 mm) maximum

Screw Size

Screw Torque

7–9 lb·in (0.882–1.02 N·m)

*Recommended screw driver P/N: TW-SD-MSL-2

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition,

2–3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 2: Specifications

P1-01AC Power Supply

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

User Specifications

P1-01AC

P1-01AC
®

100-240V
48VA
50-60Hz
125VDC, 20W

AC (L)
DC (+V)
AC (N)
DC (-V)
G
LG

Input Voltage Range (Tolerance)

100–240 VAC (-15% / +10%)
125VDC (-15% / +20%)

Rated Operating Frequency

50 to 60Hz with ±5% tolerance

Maximum Input Power

48VA (AC) 20W(DC)

Cold Start Inrush Current

21A

Maximum Inrush Current (Hot Start)

21A

Input Fuse Protection (Internal)

Micro fuse 250V, 1A
Non-replaceable

Efficiency

75%

Output Voltages

24VDC, 0.67 A

Maximum Output Power

16W

Isolated User 24VDC Output

None

Output Protection for Over Current,
Over Voltage, and Over Temperature

Self resetting

Under Input Voltage Lock-out

40–75 VAC - 24VDC On @ 76.15 VAC
55–99 VDC - 24VDC On @ 100.2 VDC

Input Transient Protection

Varistor, plus input choke and filter

Operating Design Life

10 years at full load at 40°C ambient and
5 years at 60°C ambient

General Specifications
IMPORTANT!
Hot-Swapping Information
Note: This device cannot be Hot
Swapped.

Operating Temperature

0º to 60ºC (32º to 140ºF)

Storage Temperature

-20º to 70ºC (-4º to 158ºF)

Humidity

5 to 95% (non-condensing)

Environmental Air

No corrosive gases permitted

Vibration

IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc)

Shock

IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea)

Insulation Resistance

>10MΩ @ 500VDC

Heat Dissipation

5000mW

Enclosure Type

Open Equipment

Voltage Withstand (dielectric)

2100VDC applied for 2 seconds

Module Location

Power Supply latches to CPU in the module
stacking Productivity1000 System.

EU Directive

See the “EU Directive” topic in the Productivity
Suite Help File. Information can also be
obtained at:
www.productivity1000.com

Weight

146g (5.1 oz)

Agency Approvals

UL 61010-2-201 file E139594, Canada & USA
CE (EN61131-2 EMC and EN61010-2-201
Safety)*

*See CE Declaration of Conformity for details.

2–4

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 2: Specifications

Power Connections

Power Hookup

P1-01AC

P1-01AC
®

100-240V
48VA
50-60Hz
125VDC, 20W

AC (L)
DC (+V)
AC (N)
DC (-V)
G
LG

125VDC

100–240 VAC
+V

AC (L)

-V

AC (N)

GND

LOGIC
GND

Grounding
Grounding

A good common ground reference (earth ground) is essential for proper operation of the Productivity1000
goodofcommon
ground
reference
ground)
proper
of connected to
system. One Aside
all control
circuits,
power(earth
circuits
and is
theessential
groundfor
lead
mustoperation
be properly
the either
Productivity1000
of all proximity
control circuits,
circuitsorand
earth ground by
installing asystem.
groundOne
rodside
in close
to thepower
enclosure
by the
connecting to the
incoming power
system
There must
be a single-point
ground
(i.e. installing
copper bus
bar) for all devices in
ground
leadground.
must be properly
connected
to earth ground
by either
a ground
the enclosurerod
thatinrequire
an earthtoground.
close proximity
the enclosure or by connecting to the incoming power system

ground. There must be a single-point ground (i.e. copper bus bar) for all devices in the
enclosure that require an earth ground.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition,

2–5

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 2: Specifications

Productivity1000 Alternate Power Supply Connection *
Removable
Terminal
Block
Specifications
All Productivity1000 CPUs require 24VDC
input
power.
When
using an alternate 24VDC power
P1-PWRCON (Included in PCON-KIT)
Part Number
source, connect wiring to the bottom removable terminal block as shown below.
Number of Positions
Pitch

P1-540

RUN

STOP

28–12 AWG Solid Conductor
30–12 AWG Stranded Conductor

PWR

Screw Driver Width

1/8 in (3.175 mm) Maximum

RUN

Screw Size

M2.5

CPU

Screw Torque

4.5 lb·in (0.51 N·m)

USB

PGM

LINK

Power
Terminal

ACT LINK

LG
+

Signal

Ground

–

24V DC –

24V DC +

ACT

Removable connector
included.
Productivity1000
Power Supplies
Spare connectors available

All Productivity1000
CPUs require 24VDC input power from either a P1000
(part no.PLC
PCON-KIT).
power supply or other 24VDC ±2% external power supply.

LINK
10/100

ETHERNET

RS-232

RTS TX RX

µSD

RS-485

T
+

3 Screw Terminals

3.5 mm

Wire Range
®

REMOTE I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Power supply snaps onto the P1000 CPU and will supply power to the PLC CPU
and I/O modules.
•

P1-01AC: AC Input 85–132 / 170–264 VAC, 8W (power for CPU and up to
8 modules)

P1-540

Removable Terminal Block Specifications
Part Number

PCON-KIT (Includes power terminal block)

Number of Positions
Pitch

3 Screw Terminals
3.5 mm

Wire Range

28–16 AWG Solid Conductor
28–16 AWG Stranded Conductor

Screw Driver

1/8 inch (3.175 mm) Maximum

Screw Size

Screw Torque

1.7 lb·in (0.4 N·m)

* Recommended Fuse: 2A Slow Blow

* If you do not use a Productivity1000 power supply (P1-01AC), then use a power supply that has transformer isolation. Use different 24VDC supplies for the
CPU and inductive loads to keep the CPU power clean and free of voltage spikes caused by switching solenoids, motors and relay coils.

2–6

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 2: Specifications

Productivity1000 CPU Module
P1-540 CPU Specifications

P1-540

RUN

PWR

RUN

24VDC ±2% @ 5W
plus 1.25 W per additional I/O module

Communications;
4 Integrated Ports

USB IN: Programming, Monitoring, Debug, Firmware
ETHERNET: (10/100 Mbps Ethernet) Programming,
Monitoring, Debug, Firmware, Email SMTP Client,
Modbus TCP Client (16 Servers) and Server (16
Clients), EtherNet/IP Scanner (32) and Adapter (4),
Custom Protocol over Ethernet, ProNET.
RS-232: (RJ12, 1200–115.2k baud) ASCII, Modbus
RS-485: Removable Terminal Included,
(1200–115.2k baud) ASCII, Modbus RTU

Data Logging/Project
Transfer

microSD card slot

Hardware Limits
of System

128 Hardware I/O Points: All 16-point I/O Modules

Instruction Types

Application Functions
Array Functions
Counters/Timers
Communications
Data Handling
Drum Sequencers
Math Functions

Real Time Clock
Accuracy

±2s per day typical at 25°C
±10s per day maximum at 60°C

PGM

LINK

USB

ACT LINK
ACT
LINK
10/100

IMPORTANT!

PID
Program Control
String Functions
System Functions
Contacts
Coils

General Specifications
Operating Temperature

0º to 60ºC (32º to 140ºF)

Storage Temperature

-20º to 70ºC (-4º to 158ºF)

Humidity

5 to 95% (non-condensing)

Environmental Air

No corrosive gases permitted

Vibration

IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc)

Productivity Suite

Shock

IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea)

Heat Dissipation

3810mW

Version 3.0 or later

Enclosure Type

Open Equipment

Module Location

Controller connector on the side of the power
supply in a Productivity1000 System.

EU Directive

See the “EU Directive” topic in the Productivity
Suite Help File. Information can also be
obtained at:
www.productivity1000.com

Weight

136g (4.8 oz)

Agency Approvals

UL 61010-2-201 file E139594, Canada & USA
CE (EN61131-2 EMC and EN61010-2-201
Safety)*

Hot-Swapping Information
Note: This device cannot be Hot
Swapped.

P1-540

External Power
Voltage Range*

CPU

P1-540

CPU

50MB (Includes program, data and documentation)
Flash and Battery Backed RAM
500kB
1.3 ms (1K Boolean, 128 I/O)

µSD

RTS TX RX
REMOTE I/O

ETHERNET

RS-232

RS-485

STOP

User Memory
Memory Type
Retentive Memory
Scan Time

T
+

CPU Specifications*

* If you do not use a Productivity1000 power supply
(P1-01AC), then use a power supply that has transformer
isolation. Use different 24VDC supplies for the CPU and
inductive loads to keep the CPU power clean and free of
voltage spikes caused by switching solenoids, motors and
relay coils.

*See CE Declaration of Conformity for details.
1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition,

2–7

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 2: Specifications

Productivity1000 CPU Module

CPU Status Indicators

P1-540

PWR
RUN

STOP

ACT

ACT LINK

ETHERNET

10/100 MB
Ethernet Port
- Programming
- Online monitoring
- Email (SMTP client)
- Ethernet IP Client
and Server
- Modbus TCP Client
and Server
- Custom Protocol
over Ethernet
- ProNet

microSD Port
- removable flash memory

µSD

RS-232

RTS TX RX

Micro USB 2.0 (Type B)
- Programming
- Online monitoring
- Firmware/Debug

PGM

USB

CPU

LINK

RS-485

LINK
10/100

RS-232 Serial Port (RJ12)
- Modbus/ASCII
(master or slave)
peripheral device

RUN
™

RS-485 Serial Port
- Modbus/ASCII
(master peripheral device
or multiple slave devices)
using the same protocol

REMOTE I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

CPU Front Panel

P1-540 Module Faceplate Layout

External Power
- 24VDC

P1-540

CPU Run/Stop Switch Specifications
RUN position

STOP position

Executes user program, run-time editsCPU
possible.
Status Indicators
LED is illuminated when power is ON
PWR Green
Does not execute user program,
normal
program load
position.
RUN Green LED is illuminated when CPU is in RUN mode

CPU

Red LED is illuminated during power ON reset, power down, or
watch-dog time-out

CPU Status Indicators
PWR

Green LED is illuminated when power is
ON

RUN

Green LED is illuminated when CPU is in
RUN mode

CPU

Red LED is illuminated during power ON
reset, power down, or watch-dog time-out.

CPU Run/Stop Switch Specifications

2–8

1000

RUN position

Executes user program, run-time edits possible

STOP position

Does not execute user program, normal program load position

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 2: Specifications

P1-540 Battery

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

A battery is included with the P1-540 CPU module, but is not installed. The battery
may be installed in order to retain the Time and Date along with any Tagname values
that are set up as retentive.
The battery is not required for program backup.

Battery Installation Procedure
Step One:

Step Two:

Open battery compartment
located on the top of the CPU.

Insert battery and
close compartment.

P1-540

Squeeze tabs and
pull battery holder up
to remove battery.

P1-540

Take care to insert
battery behind tab.

Battery (Optional)

D2-BAT-1

Coin type, 3.0V Lithium battery, 560mA, battery number CR2354
Coin type, 3.0 V Lithium battery, 560mA, battery number

CR2354
Note: Although not needed
for program backup, an uninstalled battery is included with the
P1-540.Note:
Install
this
battery
if you want
the CPUbackup,
to retain
Time and
Date is
along with any
Although not needed
for program
an the
uninstalled
battery
included
battery if you want the CPU to retain
Tagname
valueswith
thatthe
youP1-540.
have setInstall
up asthis
retentive.
the Time and Date along with any Tagname values that you have set up as
retentive.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition,

2–9

Chapter 2: Specifications

P1-540 Communication Ports
The P1-540 CPU has several communications ports. The following pages contain their
specifications and pin-out diagrams.

Micro USB Type B Slave Input Specifications

MicroUSB Programming Port

Port Name
MICRO USB
Used exclusively for connecting to a PC running
Standard Micro USB Slave input for programming and online
the Productivity
Suite programming software.
monitoring, with built-in surge protection. Not
Description
compatible with older full speed USB devices.

PWR

Micro USB Input Specifications

Transfer Rate

RUN

Name LED
MicroUSB
PortPort
Status
software.

PGM

LINK

USB

Description

Cables

Transfer Rate
Port Status LED

Green LED is illuminated when LINK is established to
programming software.

Cables

USB Type A to MicroUSB Type B:
6ft cable part # USB-CBL-AMICB6
15ft cable part # USB-CBL-AMICB15

ACT

ACT LINK

Standard MicroUSB Slave input for programming and

USB
Type Amonitoring,
to Micro USB
B: surge protection. Not
on-line
withType
built-in
older full speed USB devices.
6ft compatible
cable part # with
USB-CBL-AMICB6
Mbps
15ft480
cable
part # USB-CBL-AMICB15

1 VBUS

LINK
10/100

RTS TX RX
ETHERNET

RS-232

Green LED is illuminated when LINK is established to programming

CPU

µSD

RS-485

STOP

480 Mbps

USB

2 D-

P1-540

2–10

1000

PGM

RUN
®

LINK

P1-540

REMOTE I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

3 D+
4 ID
5 GND

Chapter 2: Specifications

P1-540 Ethernet Port
RJ-45 style connector used for:
• Connection to a PC running the ProductivitySuite
programming software
• Modbus TCP Client connections
(Modbus requests sent from the CPU)
P1-540

RUN

PWR

RUN

PGM

USB

P1-540

• EtherNet/IP (Client/Server)
• Custom Protocol over Ethernet

LINK

CPU

• ProNET

Port
Specifications
• Outgoing
Email
Ethernet Specifications

µSD

Ethernet SpecificationsETHERNET

ACT

ACT LINK

Port Name

LINK
10/100

RS-485
RS-232

RTS TX RX

ETHERNET

REMOTE I/O

STOP

• Modbus TCP Server connections
(Modbus requests received by the CPU)

Standard transformer isolated
Ethernet port with built-in surge protection
ETHERNET

Port Name

Description for programming, online monitoring, Email (SMTP client), Modbus/TCP

Standard
transformer
isolated
portEthernet
with built-in
client/server
connections
(fixed IPEthernet
or DHCP) and
IP client/server
surge
protection for programming, online monitoring, Email
connections.
(SMTP client), Modbus/TCP client/server connections (fixed
Transfer IP or DHCP), EtherNet/IP Scanner/Apapter, Custom Protocol
10 Mbps and 100 Mbps (auto-crossover)
Rate
over Ethernet and ProNET connections.
LINK (Amber LED) is solid when network LINK is established. ACT
Port
Status
Transfer
Rate
10 Mbps
Mbps
(Greenand
LED)100
flashes
when(auto-crossover).
port is active.
LED
Description

Port Status
LED

LINK (Amber LED) is solid when network LINK is
established. ACT (Green LED) flashes when port is active.

Crossover Cable
TD+ 1
TD– 2
RD+ 3
4
5
RD– 6
7
8

OR/WHT
OR
GRN/WHT
BLU
BLU/WHT
GRN
BRN/WHT
BRN

10/BASE-T/100BASE-TX

GRN/WHT
GRN
OR/WHT
BLU
BLU/WHT
OR
BRN/WHT
BRN

RJ45

Patch (Straight-through) Cable

TD+ 1
TD– 2
RD+ 3
4
5
RD– 6
7
8
RJ45

1000

OR/WHT
OR
GRN/WHT
BLU
BLU/WHT
GRN
BRN/WHT
BRN

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

TD+
TD–
RD+
RD–

8
1

RJ45
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

TD+
TD–
RD+
RD–

RJ45

12345678

8-pin RJ45 Connector
(8P8C)

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition,

2–11

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 2: Specifications

microSD Slot
Used for data logging.

microSD Specifications
P1-540

RUN

PWR

Port Name

microSD

Description

Standard microSD socket for data logging

Maximum Card
Capacity

32GB

RUN

USB

PGM

LINK

Transfer Rate
(ADATA microSDHC
Class 4 memory card)
µSD

Minimum

Typical

Maximum

Read

14.3

14.4

14.6

Write

4.8

4.9

5.1

Green LED is illuminated when card is inserted/
detected

ACT LINK

Port Status LED

Mbps

ACT

Pin
Pin
1

LINK
10/100

RS-485

ETHERNET

RS-232

CPU

STOP

RTS TX RX

T
+

REMOTE I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Note: Card not included with unit.

P1-540

2–12

1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

SDSD

DAT2DAT2
CD/DAT3
CD/DAT3
CMD
CMD
VDD
VDD
CLK
CLK
VSS
VSS
DAT0
DAT0
DAT1

DAT1

Chapter 2: Specifications
P1-540 RS-232 Port

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

RS-232 Port
RJ-12 style connector used for:
• Modbus RTU Master connections
• Modbus RTU Slave connections
• ASCII full or half duplex communications
P1-540

RUN

• Custom Protocol Incoming and Outgoing
communications

PWR

RUN

USB

PGM

LINK

CPU

RS-232 Specifications
Port Name

ACT LINK
ACT
LINK
10/100

RS-232

Description

Non-isolated RS-232 DTE port connects the CPU as a
Modbus/ASCII master or slave to a peripheral device.
Includes ESD and built-in surge protection

Data Rates

Selectable,1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 33600, 38400,
57600, and 115200 baud

+5V Cable Power
Source

210mA maximum at 5V, ±5%. Reverse polarity and
overload protected

TXD

RS-232 Transmit output

RXD

RS-232 Receive input

RTS

Handshaking output for modem control

GND

Logic ground

Maximum Output
Load (TXD/RTS)

3kΩ, 1000pf

Minimum Output
Voltage Swing

±5V

Output Short
Circuit Protection

±15mA

Port Status LED

Green LED is illuminated when active for TXD, RXD and
RTS

Cable Options

EA-MG-PGM-CBL
D2-DSCBL
USB-RS232 with D2-DSCBL
FA-CABKIT
FA-ISOCON for converting RS-232 to isolated RS-485

µSD

RS-232

RTS TX RX

RS-485

ETHERNET

STOP

REMOTE I/O

1
6
6-Pin RJ12 Female
Modular Connector

1000

Label

Signal

GND

Logic Ground

+5V

210mA Maximum

RXD

RS-232 Input

TXD

RS-232 Output

RTS

RS-232 Output

GND

Logic Ground

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition,

2–13

Chapter 2: Specifications

RS-485 Port

P1-540 RS-485 Port

• Modbus RTU Master connections
• Modbus RTU Slave connections
P1-540

RUN

• ASCII Incoming and Outgoing communications

PWR

RUN

USB

PGM

LINK

RS-485

Description

Non-isolated RS-485 port connects the CPU as
a Modbus/ASCII master or slave to a peripheral
device. Includes ESD/EFT protection and automatic
echo cancellation when transmitter is active

ACT LINK

Data Rates

Selectable, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 33600,
38400, 57600, and 115200 baud

TXD+/RXD+

RS-485 transceiver high

ACT

RS-232

ETHERNET

RS-485 Port Specifications
Port Name

TXD-/RXD-

RS-485 transceiver low

GND

Logic ground

Input Impedance

19kΩ

Maximum Load

50 transceivers, 19kΩ each, 60Ω termination

Output Short Circuit
Protection

±250mA, thermal shut-down protection

Electrostatic Discharge
Protection

±8kV per IEC1000-4-2

Electrical Fast Transient
Protection

±2kV per IEC1000-4-4

Minimum Differential
Output Voltage

1.5 V with 60Ω load

Fail Safe Inputs

Logic high input state if inputs are unconnected
-7.5 V to 12.5 V

µSD

• Custom Protocol Incoming and Outgoing communications

CPU

STOP

RTS TX RX

RS-485

LINK
10/100

REMOTE I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

A 4-pin removable terminal block used for:

Signal

Maximum Common Mode
Voltage

Termination

TXD+/RXD+

Port Status LED

Green LED illuminated when active for TXD and RXD

–

TXD-/RXD-

GND

Cable Options

L19827-XXX from AutomationDirect.com

Removable Terminal Block Specifications

Removable connector included.
Spare connectors available
(part no. P3-RS485CON-1).

2–14

1000

Part Number

P3-RS485CON-1

Number of Positions
Pitch

4 Screw Terminals
3.5 mm

Wire Range

28–16 AWG Solid Conductor
28–16 AWG Stranded Conductor

Screw Driver

1/8 inch (3.175 mm) Maximum

Screw Size

Screw Torque

1.7 lb·in (0.4 N·m)

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 2: Specifications

I/O Modules Overview
A variety of discrete and analog I/O modules are available for use in the P1000 System.
Each I/O module is identified as an “Input”, “Output”, or “Input/Output” module on its
front panel using the color coding scheme listed below. See the following pages for discrete
I/O module specifications and Chapter 3 for analog I/O module specifications.

Discrete Output Modules

Discrete Input Modules
P1-08ND3

Module Type and
Part Number
(Blue: Input)

V+

COM

Input Type

P1-04ADL-1

Output Type

12-24VDC
INPUT

Analog Input Modules

Module Type and
Part Number
(Red: Output)

P1-08TD1

Analog Output Modules

Module Type and
Part Number
(Blue: Input)

P1-04DAL-1

Module Type and
Part Number
(Red: Output)

3.3-24VDC
SINK OUTPUT

Discrete Input/Output Modules

P1-15CDD1
C1

Module Type and
Part Number
(White: Input/Output)

1
3
4
5

INPUTS

24V

I1+

I2+

I3+

I4+

COM

COM
0-20mA INPUT
ANALOG

COM

Input Type

4-20mA OUT
ANALOG

1000

OUTPUTS

7
24V

Output Type

V+
12-24VDC IN
3.3-24V OUT

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition,

Module Signal
Type

2–15

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 2: Specifications

Discrete I/O Modules

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Discrete Input Modules
Productivity1000 Discrete Input Modules
P1-08ND3

Part Number

Number of
Inputs

Description

See Page

P1-08SIM

Input Simulator Module

2-18

P1-08ND3

Sinking/Sourcing 12–24 VDC Input

2-19

C1
1
2
3
4
C2
5
6
7
8
12-24VDC
INPUT

Discrete Output Modules
Productivity1000 Discrete Output Modules
P1-08TD1

Part Number

V+

Number of
Outputs

Description

See Page

P1-08TD1

Sinking Output

2-22

P1-08TD2

Sourcing Output

2-25

P1-08TRS

Isolated Relay Output

2-28

P1-16TR

Relay Output

2-31

1
2
3
4
COM
5
6
7
8
3.3-24VDC
SINK OUTPUT

2–16

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 2: Specifications

Discrete Combo I/O Modules
Discrete Combo Input/Output Modules
Productivity1000 Discrete Combo Modules
P1-15CDD1
C1
1
3
4
5

INPUTS

Part Number

Inputs

Outputs

P1-15CDD1

Input: Sinking/Sourcing;
Output: Sinking

2-34

P1-15CDD2

Input: Sinking/Sourcing;
Output: Sourcing

2-37

P1-16CDR

Input: Sinking/Sourcing;
Output: Relay

2-40

6
7
8
C2

Description

See Page

1
3
4
5

OUTPUTS

le Installation
7

V+

12-24VDC IN
3.3-24V OUT

I/O Modules Installation
A variety of discrete and analog I/O modules can be added to the P1000 PLC to create a
custom control system. To add an I/O module (verify field power is not energized), with the
latch in “locked” position, align connectors on the side of each module and press together. An
audible click indicates the module lock is engaged. Verify each connecting module tab is firmly
in the locked position.

G: Do not add or remove modules with

r applied.

ne: With latch

position, align
on the side of
ule and stack
ng together.
cates lock is

wo: Attach field wiring using

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition,

secure after modules

2–17

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 2: Specifications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

P1-08SIM Input Simulator Module
The P1-08SIM Input Simulator Module provides 8 toggle switches to simulate input devices.

UL
R

Input Specifications

P1-08SIM
1

8 Internal switches

OFF to ON Response

Max. 20ms

ON to OFF Response

Max. 20ms

Status Indicators

Logic Side (8 points)

General Specifications

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
OFF

Inputs per Module

INPUT SIMULATOR

Operating Temperature

0° to 60°C (32° to 140°F)

Storage Temperature

-20° to 70°C (-4° to 158°F)

Humidity

5 to 95% (non-condensing)

Environmental Air

No corrosive gases permitted

Vibration

IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc)

Shock

IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea)

Heat Dissipation

200mW

Enclosure Type

Open Equipment

Module Location

Any I/O slot in a Productivity1000 System.

EU Directive

See the “EU Directive” topic in the Productivity
Suite Help File. Information can also be obtained
at: www.productivity1000.com

Weight

70g (2.5 oz)

Agency Approvals

UL 61010-2-201 file E139594, Canada & USA
CE (EN61131-2 EMC and EN61010-2-201
Safety)*

* See CE Declaration of Conformity for details. See the D.O.C. for details.

2–18

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 2: Specifications

P1-08ND3 Sinking/Sourcing DC Input
The P1-08ND3 Fast Response Input Module provides eight inputs for switches and
other devices connected to ground or supplies ranging from 12–24 VDC for use with the
Productivity1000 system.
C

UL
R

Input Specifications
Inputs per Module

8 (Sink/Source)

External 24VDC Power Required

12–24 VDC

Input Voltage Range

10.2–26.4 VDC

Peak Voltage

30VDC

Input Current

3.5 mA @ 12VDC
7.5 mA @ 24VDC

Maximum Input Current @ Temp

10mA @ 26.4 VDC

Input Impedance

3kΩ

ON Voltage Level

>9.5 VDC

OFF Voltage Level

<7VDC

Maximum ON Current

2mA

Maximum OFF Current

1.6 mA

OFF to ON Response

ON to OFF Response

Status Indicators

Logic Side (8 points)

Commons

2 (4 points/common)

P1-08ND3

2ms Maximum, 1ms Typical

C2
5
6
7
8
12-24VDC
INPUT

Terminal blocks sold separately.
We recommend using pre-wired ZIPLink cables and
connection modules. See Chapter 5.
If you wish to hand-wire your module, removable
terminal blocks are sold separately. Order part
number P1-10RTB or P1-10RTB-1

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition,

2–19

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 2: Specifications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

P1-08ND3 Sinking/Sourcing DC Input, (continued)
General Specifications
Operating Temperature

0° to 60°C (32° to 140°F),

Storage Temperature

-20° to 70°C (-4° to 158°F)

Humidity

5 to 95% (non-condensing)

Environmental Air

No corrosive gases permitted

Vibration

IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc)

Shock

IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea)

Field to Logic Side Isolation

1800VAC applied for 1 second

Insulation Resistance

>10MV @ 500 VDC

Heat Dissipation

2000mW

Enclosure Type

Open Equipment

Module Location

Any I/O position in a Productivity1000 System.

Field Wiring

Use ZIPLink wiring system or removable terminal
block (sold separately). See “Wiring Options” in
Chapter 5.

EU Directive

See the “EU Directive” topic in the Productivity
Suite Help File. Information can also be obtained
at: www.productivity1000.com

Connector Type (sold separately)

10-position removable terminal block

Weight

85g (3oz)

Agency Approvals

UL 61010-2-201 file E139594, Canada & USA
CE (EN61131-2 EMC and EN61010-2-201 Safety)*

* See the Declaration of Conformity for details.

Removable Terminal Block Specifications
Part Number

P1-10RTB

P1-10RTB-1

Number of
Positions

10 Screw Terminals

10 Spring Clamp Terminals

Wire Range

30–16 AWG (0.051–1.31mm²)
Solid / Stranded Conductor
3/64 in. (1.2 mm) Insulation
Max.
1/4 in. (6–7 mm) Strip Length

28–16 AWG (0.081–1.31 mm²)
Solid / Stranded Conductor
3/64 in. (1.2 mm) Insulation Max.
19/64 in. (7–8 mm) Strip Length

Conductors

“USE COPPER CONDUCTORS, 75°C” or Equivalent.

Screw Driver

0.1 inch (2.5 mm) Maximum*

Screw Size

N/A

Screw Torque

2.5 lb·in (0.28 N·m)

N/A

* Recommended screw driver: P/N TW-SD-MSL-1.

2–20

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Equivalent Input Circuit

Chapter 2: Specifications

Internal Module Circuitry

24VDC

Optical Isolator

INPUT

P1-08ND3 Sinking/Sourcing DC Input (continued)
+

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Wiring Diagrams

COM

Single Supply

–

24VDC

–

24VDC

9 10

8
P1-08ND3 Schematic and Wiring Diagram

Equivalent Input Circuit
Internal Module Circuitry

24VDC

Optical Isolator

INPUT
+
+

COM

Single Supply

Hardware User
Manual, 1st Edition,
7
9 1

1000

–

24VDC

–

24VDC

2–21

Chapter 2: Specifications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

P1-08TD1 Sinking DC Output
The P1-08TD1 DC Output Module provides eight outputs that sink up to 1A per output
from loads powered by 3.3–24 VDC supplies for use with the Productivity1000 system.
C

UL
R

Output Specifications

P1-08TD1

V+
1
2
3
4

Outputs per Module

8 sinking

Output Type

N-channel MOSFET, open drain

Rated Voltage

3.3–24 VDC

Operating Voltage Range (Tolerance)

2.9–26.4 VDC

Maximum Output Current

1A continuous

Minimum Load Current

1mA

Maximum Leakage Current

0.3 mA @ 26.4 VDC

On Voltage Drop

0.2 VDC

Maximum Inrush Current

4A for 50ms, 6A for 10ms

OFF to ON Response

≤0.5 ms

ON to OFF Response

≤0.5 ms

Status Indicators

Logic Side (8 pins)

Commons

1 non-isolated

Maximum Applicable Fuse

External Power Supply Required

12–24 VDC (-15%/+20%), 22mA

Removable Terminal Block Specifications
Part Number

COM
5

10 Spring Clamp Terminals

Wire Range

30–16 AWG (0.051–1.31 mm²)
Solid / Stranded Conductor
3/64 in. (1.2 mm) Insulation Max.
1/4 in. (6–7 mm) Strip Length

28–16 AWG (0.081–1.31 mm²)
Solid / Stranded Conductor
3/64 in. (1.2 mm) Insulation Max.
19/64 in. (7–8 mm) Strip Length

Conductors

“USE COPPER CONDUCTORS, 75°C” or Equivalent.

Screw Driver

0.1 in (2.5 mm) Maximum*

Screw Size

N/A

Screw Torque

2.5 lb·in (0.28 N·m)

N/A

8
3.3-24VDC
SINK OUTPUT

Terminal blocks sold separately.

P1-10RTB-1

10 Screw Terminals

6
7

P1-10RTB

Number of
Positions

* Recommended screw driver: P/N TW-SD-MSL-1

NOTE: Module shown with flip-up finger-safe terminal cover removed for clarity.
We recommend using pre-wired ZIPLink cables
and connection modules. See Chapter 5.
If you wish to hand-wire your module, removable
terminal blocks are sold separately. Order part
number P1-10RTB or P1-10RTB-1

2–22

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 2: Specifications

P1-08TD1 Sinking DC Output (continued)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

General Specifications
Operating Temperature

0° to 60°C (32° to 140°F)

Storage Temperature

-20° to 70°C (-4° to 158°F)

Humidity

5 to 95% (non-condensing)

Environmental Air

No corrosive gases permitted

Vibration

IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc)

Shock

IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea)

Field to Logic Side Isolation

1800VAC applied for 1 second

Insulation Resistance

>10MΩ @ 500VDC

Heat Dissipation

1800mW

Enclosure Type

Open Equipment

Module Keying to Backplane

Electronic

Module Location

Any I/O position in a Productivity1000 System

Field Wiring

Use ZIPLink Wiring System or removable terminal block
(sold separately). See “Wiring Options” in Chapter 5.

EU Directive

See the “EU Directive” topic in the Productivity Suite
Help File. Information can also be obtained at: www.
productivity1000.com

Connector Type
(sold separately)
Weight
Agency Approvals

10-position removable terminal block
60g (2.1 oz)
UL 61010-2-201 file E139594, Canada & USA
CE (EN61131-2 EMC and EN61010-2-201 Safety)*

* See CE Declaration of Conformity for details.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition,

2–23

Chapter 2: Specifications
COM

Wiring Diagrams
Single Power Source

Dual Power Source

COM

P1-08TD1 Schematic and Wiring Diagram
Sink
V+

INTERNAL MODULE

DIGITAL
ISOLATION

OUTPUT

8A Max
12–24V

COM

Single Power Source

+
8A Max

L
L

4
0V
5

9 10

24V

12–24VDC

1000

9 10

2–24

8A Max

12–24VDC

24V

Dual Power Source

L
L
L

8
L
Hardware
User Manual, 1st
Edition

9 10

4
COM

24V

8A Max

9 10

8A Max

12–24VDC

24V

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

P1-08TD1 Sinking DC Output (continued)

7
8

Chapter 2: Specifications

P1-08TD2 Sourcing DC Output
The P1-08TD2 DC Output Module provides eight non-isolated outputs that source up to 1A
per output from a 12–24 VDC supply for use with the Productivity1000 system.
C

UL
R

P1-08TD2

V+
1
2
3
4
COM
5
6
7
8
12-24VDC
SOURCE OUT

Terminal blocks sold separately.

Output Specifications
Outputs per Module

8 sourcing

Voltage Rating

12–24 VDC

Operating Voltage Range

10.2–28.8 VDC

Output Type
Maximum Output Current

P-channel MOSFET, open source
1A per point

Minimum Load Current

1mA

Maximum Leakage Current
On Voltage Drop
Maximum Inrush Current

0.3 mA @ 28.8 VDC
0.2 VDC @ 1A
4A for 50ms, 6A for 10ms

OFF to ON Response

0.5 ms

ON to OFF Response
Status Indicators
Commons
Maximum Applicable Fuses

0.5 ms
Logic Side (8 points)
1
8A

External Power Supply Required

12–24 VDC (-15%/+20%) @ 22mA

Removable Terminal Block Specifications
Part Number

P1-10RTB

P1-10RTB-1

Number of
Positions

10 Screw Terminals

10 Spring Clamp Terminals

Wire Range

30–16 AWG (0.051–1.31 mm²)
Solid / Stranded Conductor
3/64 in. (1.2 mm) Insulation Max.
1/4 in. (6–7 mm) Strip Length

28–16 AWG (0.081–1.31 mm²)
Solid / Stranded Conductor
3/64 in. (1.2 mm) Insulation Max.
19/64 in. (7–8 mm) Strip Length

Conductors

“USE COPPER CONDUCTORS, 75°C” or Equivalent.

Screw Driver

0.1 in (2.5 mm) Maximum*

Screw Size

N/A

Screw Torque

2.5 lb·in (0.28 N·m)

N/A

* Recommended screw driver: P/N TW-SD-MSL-1

We recommend using pre-wired ZIPLink cables
and connection modules. See Chapter 5.
If you wish to hand-wire your module, removable
terminal blocks are sold separately. Order part
number P1-10RTB or P1-10RTB-1.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition,

2–25

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 2: Specifications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

P1-08TD2 Sourcing DC Output (continued)
General Specifications
Operating Temperature

0° to 60°C (32° to 140°F)

Storage Temperature

-20° to 70°C (-4° to 158°F)

Humidity

5 to 95% (non-condensing)

Environmental Air

No corrosive gases permitted

Vibration

IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc)

Shock

IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea)

Field to Logic Side Isolation

1800VAC applied for 1 second

Insulation Resistance

>10MΩ @ 500VDC

Heat Dissipation

2600mW

Enclosure Type

Open Equipment

Module Keying to Backplane

Electronic

Module Location

Any I/O position in a Productivity1000 system

Field Wiring

Use ZIPLink Wiring System or removable terminal
block (sold separately). See “Wiring Options” in
Chapter 5.

EU Directive

See the “EU Directive” topic in the Productivity
Suite Help File. Information can also be obtained
at: www.productivity1000.com

Connector Type
(sold separately)
Weight

10-position removable terminal block
58g (2.1 oz)
UL 61010-2-201 file E139594, Canada & USA
CE (EN61131-2 EMC and EN61010-2-201
Safety)*

Agency Approvals

* See CE Declaration of Conformity for details.

2–26

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 2: Specifications

12–24 V

L
P1-08TD2 Sourcing Output
(continued)
0V

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Wiring Diagrams
Single Power Source
8A Max

12–24 VDC

4
COM

9 10

V+

L
L
L
L

P1-08TD2 Schematic and Wiring Diagram
Source

INTERNAL MODULE

24V

DIGITAL
ISOLATION
8A Max

12–24 V

COM

Single Power Source
8A Max

V+

1
Hardware User Manual,
1st Edition,
2
3

1000

12–24 VDC

2–27

Chapter 2: Specifications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

P1-08TRS Isolated Relay
The P1-08TRS high-current isolated relay output module provides eight, 3A surge protected
outputs. The P1-08TRS offers both normally open and normally closed relay contacts for use
with the Productivity1000 System.
C

UL
R

Output Specifications

P1-08TRS
NC1
C1
NO1
C2
NO2
C3
NO3
C4
NO4
NC5
C5
NO5
C6
NO6
C7
NO7
C8
NO8
RELAY
OUTPUT

Terminal blocks sold separately.

Outputs per Module

Rated Voltage

6.25–30 VDC
6–120 VAC

Operating Voltage Range

5.1–28.8 VDC
5.1–132 VAC

Output type

6 Relays, FORM A (SPST)
2 Relays, FORM C (SPDT)

AC Frequency

47–63 Hz

Maximum Output Current

3A / point @ 60°C for both AC and DC
2A / point if used with ZIPLink Cable

Minimum Load Current

5mA @ 5VDC

Maximum Inrush Current

3A for 10ms

OFF to ON Response

<10ms

ON to OFF Response

<10ms

Status Indicators

Logic Side (8 points)

Commons

8 Isolated (1 point / common)

Maximum Applicable Fuse

8A Max

Removable Terminal Block Specifications
Part Number

P2-RTB

P2-RTB-1

Number of Positions

18 Screw Terminals

18 Spring Clamp Terminals

Wire Range

30–16 AWG (0.051– 1.31 mm²)
Solid / Stranded Conductor
3/64 in. (1.2 mm) Insulation Max.
1/4 in. (6–7 mm) Strip Length

28–16 AWG (0.081–1.31 mm²)
Solid / Stranded Conductor
3/64 in. (1.2 mm) Insulation Max.
19/64 in. (7–8 mm) Strip Length

Conductors

“USE COPPER CONDUCTORS, 75°C” or Equivalent.

Screw Driver

0.1 in (2.5 mm) Maximum*

Screw Size

N/A

Screw Torque

2.5 lb·in (0.28 N·m)

N/A

* Recommended screw driver: P/N TW-SD-MSL-1

We recommend using pre-wired ZIPLink cables
and connection modules. See Chapter 5.
If you wish to hand-wire your module,
removable terminal blocks are sold separately.
Order part number P2-RTB or P2-RTB-1.

2–28

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 2: Specifications

P1-08TRS Isolated Relay (continued)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

General Specifications
Operating Temperature

0° to 60°C (32° to 140°F),

Storage Temperature

-20° to 70°C (-4° to 158°F)

Humidity

5 to 95% (non-condensing)

Environmental Air

No corrosive gases permitted

Vibration

IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc)

Shock

IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea)

Field to Logic Side Isolation

1800VAC applied for 1 second

Insulation Resistance

>10MΩ @ 500VDC

Heat Dissipation

3000mW

Enclosure Type

Open Equipment

Module Keying

Electronic

Module Location

Any I/O position in a Productivity1000 system

Field Wiring

Use ZIPLink Wiring System or removable terminal
block (sold separately). See “Wiring Options” in
Chapter 5.

EU Directive

See the “EU Directive” topic in the Productivity
Suite Help File. Information can also be obtained
at: www.productivity1000.com

Connector Type (sold separately)

18-position removable terminal block

Weight

112g (4oz)

Agency Approvals

UL 61010-2-201 file E139594, Canada & USA
CE (EN61131-2 EMC and EN61010-2-201
Safety)*

* See CE Declaration of Conformity for details.

Typical Relay Life
Voltage & Type of Load

Operations at 4A Load Current

30VDC Resistive

100,000

30VDC Solenoid

100,000

120VAC Resistive

100,000

120VAC Solenoid

100,000

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition,

2–29

Chapter 2:

8A
Relay
Drive
Circuit

P1-08TRS Isolated Relay (continued)
OUTPUT

Wiring Diagrams

6–27 VDC
6–120 VAC
50–60 Hz

NC1

NO2

NO1

NO3
C4

L
L

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

6–27 VDC
6–120 VAC
Specifications
50–60 Hz

L
L
L

NO4
NC5
C5
NO5
C6
NO6
C7
NO7
C8

P1-08TRS Schematic and Wiring Diagram
L

User Supplied
External Fuse

NO8

Internal Module Circuitry
COM

6–27 VDC
6–120 VAC
50–60 Hz

Relay
Drive
Circuit

OUTPUT

6–27 VDC
6–120 VAC
50–60 Hz
1000

NC1 1st Edition
Hardware User Manual,
1

2–30

Chapter 2: Specifications

P1-16TR Relay Output
The P1-16TR Relay Output Module provides sixteen 2A outputs with two isolated commons
for use with the Productivity1000 system.
C

UL
R

Output Specifications
Outputs Channels

Rated Voltage

6.25–30 VDC, 6–120 VAC

Operating Voltage Range

5–30 VDC, 5–144 VAC

Output Type

Relay, FORM A (SPST)

AC Frequency

47–63 Hz

Maximum Output Current

2A / point, 8A / common for both AC and DC
2A / point, 4A / common if used with ZIPLink Cable

Minimum Load Current

5mA @ 5VDC

Maximum Inrush Current

2400VA make, 240VA break @ 120 or 240VAC
(Make current is 2 AC cycles)

OFF to ON Response

≤10ms

ON to OFF Response

≤10ms

Status Indicators

Logic Side (16 points)

Commons

2 Isolated (8 point / common)

Maximum Applicable Fuse

P1-16TR
C1
1
2
3
4

7
8
C2
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
RELAY
OUTPUT

Terminal blocks sold separately.

Removable Terminal Block Specifications
Part Number

P2-RTB

P2-RTB-1

Number of
Positions

18 Screw Terminals

18 Spring Clamp Terminals

Wire Range

30–16 AWG (0.051–1.31 mm²)
Solid / Stranded Conductor
3/64 in. (1.2 mm) Insulation Max.
1/4 in. (6–7 mm) Strip Length

28–16 AWG (0.081–1.31 mm²)
Solid / Stranded Conductor
3/64 in. (1.2 mm) Insulation Max.
19/64 in. (7–8 mm) Strip Length

Conductors

“USE COPPER CONDUCTORS, 75°C” or Equivalent.

Screw Driver

0.1 in (2.5 mm) Maximum*

Screw Size

N/A

Screw Torque

2.5 lb·in (0.28 N·m)

N/A

* Recommended screw driver: P/N TW-SD-MSL-1

We recommend using pre-wired ZIPLink cables
and connection modules. See Chapter 5.
If you wish to hand-wire your module,
removable terminal blocks are sold separately.
Order part number P2-RTB or P2-RTB-1.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition,

2–31

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 2: Specifications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

P1-16TR Relay Output (continued)
General Specifications
Operating Temperature

0° to 60°C (32° to 140°F)

Storage Temperature

-20° to 70°C (-4° to 158°F)

Humidity

5 to 95% (non-condensing)

Environmental Air

No corrosive gases permitted

Vibration

IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc)

Shock

IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea)

Field to Logic Side Isolation

1800VAC applied for 1 second

Insulation Resistance

>10MΩ @ 500VDC

Heat Dissipation

3000mW

Enclosure Type

Open Equipment

Module Location

Any I/O position in a Productivity1000 System.

Field Wiring

Use ZIPLink Wiring System or removable terminal block
(sold separately). See “Wiring Options” in Chapter 5.

EU Directive

See the “EU Directive” topic in the Productivity Suite
Help File. Information can also be obtained at: www.
productivity1000.com

Connector Type (sold
separately)
Weight

18-position removable terminal block
91g (3.2 oz)
UL 61010-2-201 file E139594, Canada & USA
CE (EN61131-2 EMC and EN61010-2-201 Safety)*

Agency Approvals

* See CE Declaration of Conformity for details.

Typical Relay Life

2–32

Voltage & Type of Load

Operations at 1A Load Current

30VDC Resistive

100,000

30VDC Solenoid

100,000

120VAC Resistive

100,000

120VAC Solenoid

100,000

240VAC Resistive

100,000

240VAC Solenoid

100,000

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 2: Specifications

P1-16TR Relay Output (continued)
Wiring Diagrams

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

C2
9

P1-16TR Schematic and Wiring Diagram
6–24 VDC
6 –120 VAC
50 – 60 Hz

3
4
5
6

L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L

50–60 Hz

6–24 VDC
6–120 VAC
50–60 Hz

L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L

135–240 VAC

6–24 VDC
6–120 VAC
50–60 Hz

EXTERNAL
FUSE
RECOMMENDED

C1 an
Be Link
for this V

8
C2
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

User Supplied
External Fuse

8A Max

EXTERNAL
FUSE
RECOMMENDED
8A Max

1000

Hardware C1
User Manual, 1st Edition,
2

6–24 VDC
6–120 VAC
50–60 Hz

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

2–33

Chapter 2: Specifications

The P1-15CDD1 Input/Output Module provides eight 12–24 VDC inputs plus seven
outputs that sink up to 1A per output for loads connected to 3.3–24 V supplies for use with
the Productivity1000 system.
C

UL
R

Input Specifications

Inputs

8 (sink/source)

Rated Voltage

12–24 VDC

Operating Voltage Range

10.2–26.4 VDC

Input Current

7.6 mA @ 24VDC

Maximum Input Current

8.8 mA @ 27.6 VDC)

Maximum ON Current

2.5 mA

Maximum OFF Current

0.5 mA

ON Voltage Level

>7.6 VDC

OFF Voltage Level

<6.4 VDC

OFF to ON Response

2ms Max

ON to OFF Response

2ms Max

Status Indicators

Logic Side (8 points)

Commons

4
5

INPUTS

P1-15CDD1

2
3
4
5

Output Specifications

OUTPUTS

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

P1-15CDD1 Input/Output Module

6
7
V+
12-24VDC IN
3.3-24V OUT

Terminal blocks sold separately.

Outputs per Module

7 sinking

Rated Voltage

3.3–24 VDC

Operating Voltage Range

2.8–30 VDC

Maximum Output Current

1A continuous
4A temporary overload, 50ms
6A temporary overload, 10ms

On Voltage Drop

0.18 VDC

OFF to ON Response

0.5 ms

ON to OFF Response

0.5 ms

Status Indicators

Logic Side (7 points)

Commons

Maximum Applicable Fuse

External Power Supply Required

12–24 VDC (-15%/+20%) @ 25mA

2–34

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 2: Specifications

P1-15CDD1 Input/Output Module (continued)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

General Specifications
Operating Temperature

0° to 60°C (32° to 140°F)

Storage Temperature

-20° to 70°C (-4° to 158°F)

Humidity

5 to 95% (non-condensing)

Environmental Air

No corrosive gases permitted

Vibration

IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc)

Shock

IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea)

Field to Logic Side Isolation

1800VAC applied for 1 second

Insulation Resistance

>10MΩ @ 500VDC

Heat Dissipation

1800mW

Enclosure Type

Open Equipment

Module Location

Any I/O slot in any Productivity1000 System.

Field Wiring

Use ZIPLink Wiring System or removable terminal
block (sold separately). See “Wiring Options” in
Chapter 5.

EU Directive

See the “EU Directive” topic in the Productivity Suite
Help File. Information can also be obtained at: www.
productivity1000.com

Connector Type (sold separately)

18-position removable terminal block

Weight

71g (2.5 oz)

Agency Approvals

UL 61010-2-201 file E139594, Canada & USA
CE (EN61131-2 EMC and EN61010-2-201 Safety)*

* See CE Declaration of Conformity for details..

Removable Terminal Block Specifications
Part Number

P2-RTB

P2-RTB-1

Number of
Positions

18 Screw Terminals

18 Spring Clamp Terminals

Wire Range

30–16 AWG (0.051–1.31mm²)
Solid / Stranded Conductor
3/64 in. (1.2 mm) Insulation Max.
1/4 in. (6–7 mm) Strip Length

28–16 AWG (0.081–1.31 mm²)
Solid / Stranded Conductor
3/64 in. (1.2 mm) Insulation Max.
19/64 in. (7–8 mm) Strip Length

Conductors

“USE COPPER CONDUCTORS, 75°C” or Equivalent.

Screw Driver

0.1 in (2.5 mm) Maximum*

Screw Size

N/A

Screw Torque

2.5 lb·in (0.28 N·m)

N/A

* Recommended screw driver: P/N TW-SD-MSL-1

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition,

2–35

Sink

Chapter 2: Specifications

V+

INTERNAL MODULE

DIGITAL
ISOLATION

OUTPUT

12–24 VDC

P1-15CDD1 Input/Output Module (continued)

1 Wiring Diagrams
2
C1
1
3
2
3
+
4
4
5
5
6
7
6
8
C2
7
- +
1
L
2
L
8
3
L P1-15CDD1 Schematic
and Wiring Diagram
4
L
9
5
L
L
6
10
L
7
- +
V+
11
P1-15CDD1 Schematic and Wiring Diagram
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
C1/C2

24VDC

2
3

+
-

4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

3.3–24 VDC

Typical Input Circuit

24VDC

12–24 VDC

Internal Module Circuitry

Optical Isolator

INPUT

COM

Typical Input Circuit

Typical Output Circuit

Sink

Internal Module Circuitry

24VDC

Optical Isolator

INPUT

INTERNAL MODULE

DIGITAL
ISOLATION

OUTPUT

V+

12–24 VDC

COM

Typical Output Circuit

Sink

C1/C2

INTERNAL MODULE

9 10 1

+
-

12–24 VDC

24VDC

DIGITAL
ISOLATION

OUTPUT

V+

+
-

C1/C2

1000

2–36

24VDC

Hardware
User Manual, 1st Edition
1

Chapter 2: Specifications

P1-15CDD2 Input/Output
The P1-15CDD2 Input/Output Module provides eight 12–24 VDC inputs plus seven 12–24
VDC outputs that source up to 1A per output to loads connected to ground for use with the
Productivity1000 system.
C

UL
R

Input Specifications
Inputs per Module

8 (Sinking/Sourcing)

Rated Voltage

12–24 VDC

Operating Voltage Range

10.4–28.8 VDC

Input Current

8.4 mA @ 24VDC

Maximum Input Current

11mA @ 28.8 VDC)

Input Impedance

3kΩ

Maximum ON Current

2.5 mA

Maximum OFF Current

1.8 mA

ON Voltage Level*

>8VDC

OFF Voltage Level

<6VDC

OFF to ON Response

V+
1

ON to OFF Response
Status Indicators

Logic Side (8 points)

Commons

3
4
5

OUTPUTS

INPUTS

P1-15CDD2

6
7
C2
12-24VDC
INPUT/OUTPUT

Terminal blocks sold separately.

2ms max

Output Specifications
Outputs per Module

7 (sourcing)

Voltage Rating

12–24 VDC

Operating Voltage Range

10.2–28.8 VDC

Maximum Output Current

1A continuous
4A temporary overload, 50ms
6A temporary overload, 10ms

On Voltage Drop

25mV

OFF to ON Response

0.5 ms

ON to OFF Response
Status Indicators
Commons
Maximum Applicable Fuse

0.5 ms
Logic Side (7 points)
1
8A

External Power Supply Required

12–24 VDC (-20%/+25%) @ 50mA

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition,

2–37

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 2: Specifications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

P1-15CDD2 Input/Output Module (continued)
General Specifications
Operating Temperature

0° to 60°C (32° to 140°F)

Storage Temperature

-20° to 70°C (-4° to 158°F)

Humidity

5 to 95% (non-condensing)

Environmental Air

No corrosive gases permitted

Vibration

IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc)

Shock

IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea)

Field to Logic Side Isolation

1800VAC applied for 1 second

Insulation Resistance

>10MΩ @ 500VDC

Heat Dissipation

1800mW

Enclosure Type

Open Equipment

Module Keying

Electronic

Module Location

Any I/O position in a Productivity1000 system

Field Wiring

Use ZIPLink Wiring System or removable terminal
block (sold separately). See “Wiring Options” in
Chapter 5.

EU Directive

See the “EU Directive” topic in the Productivity Suite
Help File. Information can also be obtained at:
www.productivity1000.com

Connector Type (sold separately)

18-position removable terminal block

Weight

71g (2.5 oz)

Agency Approvals

UL 61010-2-201 file E139594, Canada & USA
CE (EN61131-2 EMC and EN61010-2-201 Safety)*

* See CE Declaration of Conformity for details.

Removable Terminal Block Specifications
Part Number

P2-RTB

P2-RTB-1

Number of
Positions

18 Screw Terminals

18 Spring Clamp Terminals

Wire Range

30–16 AWG (0.051–1.31 mm²)
Solid / Stranded Conductor
3/64 in. (1.2 mm) Insulation
Max.
1/4 in. (6–7 mm) Strip Length

28–16 AWG (0.081–1.31 mm²)
Solid / Stranded Conductor
3/64 in. (1.2 mm) Insulation Max.
19/64 in. (7–8 mm) Strip Length

Conductors

“USE COPPER CONDUCTORS, 75°C” or Equivalent.

Screw Driver

0.1 in (2.5 mm) Maximum*

Screw Size

N/A

Screw Torque

2.5 lb·in (0.28 N·m)

N/A

* Recommended screw driver: P/N TW-SD-MSL-1

2–38

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

+12–24 VDC
- +

INTERNAL MODULE CIRCUITRY

8A Max
*

Chapter 2: Specifications

Optical Isolator

OUTPUT

P1-15CDD2 Input/Output Module (continued)
COM

1
2
C1
3
1
2
4
3
4
5
5
6
6
7
8
7
V+
1
L
2
L
8
and Wiring Diagram
3
L P1-15CDD2 Schematic
4
L
9
5
L
L
6
10
L
7
C2
11
P1-15CDD2 Schematic and Wiring Diagram
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Wiring Diagrams

*Zener Diode Power Dissipation: 200mW

24VDC

2
3
4

+
-

5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

8A Max

12–24 VDC

+
-

Equivalent Input Circuit
INTERNAL MODULE CIRCUITRY

INPUT

Optical Isolator

+12–24 VDC

Equivalent Output Circuit

Equivalent Input Circuit

Source

INTERNAL MODULE CIRCUITRY

V+

INTERNAL MODULE

INPUT

DIGITAL
ISOLATION

Optical Isolator

8A Max

+
-

+12–24 VDC

12–24 V

+
-

Equivalent Output Circuit

1000

12–24 VDC

8A Max

4
5
6
7

9 10 11 12 13 14

24VDC

+
-

12–24 V

8A Max

DIGITAL
ISOLATION

24VDC

INTERNAL MODULE

V+

Source

+
-

L
Hardware User Manual,
1st Edition,
L

8
V+
1
2
3

2–39

Chapter 2: Specifications

The P1-16CDR Discrete Input / Relay Output Module provides eight 24 VAC/VDC inputs
and eight relay outputs for use with the Productivity1000 system.
C

UL
R

Input Specifications

P1-16CDR
C1
1
3
4
5

INPUTS

6
7
8
C2
1
2
3
4
5

OUTPUTS

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

P1-16CDR Discrete Input/ Relay Output Module

Inputs per Module

8 (sink/source)

Rated Voltage

24 VAC/VDC

Operating Voltage Range

20.4–27.6 VAC/VDC

Peak Voltage

27.6 VAC/ 30VDC

AC Frequency

47–63 Hz

Input Current

8mA @ 24 VAC/VDC

Maximum Input Current

10mA @ 27.6 VAC
10mA @ 30VDC

ON Voltage Level

>9.5 VDC, >8VAC

OFF Voltage Level

<4.5 VDC, <4VAC

Maximum ON Current

2.5 mA

Maximum OFF Current

0.5 mA

OFF to ON Response

AC: 10ms

DC: 6ms

ON to OFF Response

AC: 20ms

DC: 10ms

Status Indicators

Logic Side (8 points)

Commons

1 (8 points/common)

Output Specifications

6
7
8
24VAC/VDC IN
RELAY OUTPUT

Terminal blocks sold separately.

We recommend using pre-wired ZIPLink
cables and connection modules. See
Chapter 5.

Outputs per Module

Rated Voltage

6.25–24 VDC
6–120 VAC

Operating Voltage Range

5.31–28.8 VDC
5–132 VAC

Output Type

Relay, Form A (SPST)

AC Frequency

47–63 Hz

Maximum Output Current

1A / point, 8A / common @ 60°C
for both AC and DC

Minimum Load Current

5mA @ 5VDC

Maximum Inrush Current
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Status Indicators

5A for 10ms

Commons

1 (8 point / common)

Maximum Applicable Fuse

m10ms
Logic Side (8 points)

If you wish to hand-wire your module, removable
terminal blocks are sold separately. Order part
number P2-RTB or P2-RTB-1.

2–40

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 2: Specifications

P1-16CDR Discrete Input/ Relay Output Module

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

General Specifications
Operating Temperature

0° to 60°C (32° to 140°F)

Storage Temperature

-20° to 70°C (-4° to 158°F)

Humidity

5 to 95% (non-condensing)

Environmental Air

No corrosive gases permitted

Vibration

IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc)

Shock

IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea)

Field to Logic Side Isolation

1800VAC applied for 1 second

Insulation Resistance

>10MΩ @ 500VDC

Heat Dissipation

2730mW

Enclosure Type

Open Equipment

Module Location

Any I/O position in a Productivity1000 System.

Field Wiring

Use ZIPLink Wiring System or removable terminal
block (sold separately). See “Wiring Options” in
Chapter 5.

EU Directive

See the “EU Directive” topic in the Productivity Suite
Help File. Information can also be obtained at:
www.productivity1000.com

Connector Type (sold separately)

18-position removable terminal block

Weight

88g (3.2 oz)

Agency Approvals

UL 61010-2-201 file E139594, Canada & USA
CE (EN61131-2 EMC and EN61010-2-201 Safety)*

* See CE Declaration of Conformity for details.

Removable Terminal Block Specifications
Part Number

P2-RTB

P2-RTB-1

Number of
Positions

18 Screw Terminals

18 Spring Clamp Terminals

Wire Range

30–16 AWG (0.051–1.31 mm²)
Solid / Stranded Conductor
3/64 in. (1.2 mm) Insulation Max.
1/4 in. (6–7 mm) Strip Length

28–16 AWG (0.081–1.31 mm²)
Solid / Stranded Conductor
3/64 in. (1.2 mm) Insulation Max.
19/64 in. (7–8 mm) Strip Length

Conductors

“USE COPPER CONDUCTORS, 75°C” or Equivalent.

Screw Driver

0.1 in (2.5 mm) Maximum*

Screw Size

N/A

Screw Torque

2.5 lb·in (0.28 N·m)

N/A

* Recommended screw driver: P/N TW-SD-MSL-1

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition,

2–41

6–24 VDC
6 – 120 VAC
50 – 60 Hz

Chapter 2: Specifications

P1-16CDR Discrete Input/ Relay Output Module (continued)

3
4

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

C2
1
2

4
5
6
7
8

EXTERNAL
FUSE
RECOMMENDED

Internal Module Circuitry

Optical Isolator

INPUT

Equivalent Input Circuit

24VDC

6–24 VDC
6–120 VAC
50–60 Hz

24VAC

24VDC

24VAC
50–60 Hz

1
Wiring Diagrams
2
3
4
5
+
+
6
7
8
L
L
9
L
L
10
L
P1-16CDR
Schematic
and
Wiring
Diagram
L
11
L
L
12
13
P1-16CDR Schematic and Wiring Diagram
14
A
B
C
D
+

COM

Equivalent Output Circuit

6–24 VDC
6 – 120 VAC
50 – 60 Hz

User Supplied
External Fuse

Equivalent Input Circuit

24VAC

Internal Module Circuitry

24VDC

INPUT

Optical Isolator

COM

Equivalent Output Circuit

+
-

5
6

1000

2–42

24VDC

24VAC
50–60 Hz

6– 27 VDC
6 – 240 VAC
50 – 60 Hz

User Supplied
External Fuse

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter

Analog I/O
Specifications

In This Chapter...
Analog I/O Modules Overview................................................................................... 3–2
Analog I/O Modules................................................................................................... 3–3
Analog Input Modules................................................................................................ 3–4
Analog Output Modules........................................................................................... 3–21

1000

Chapter 3: Analog I/O Specifications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Analog I/O Modules Overview
A variety of analog I/O modules are available for use with Productivity1000 system.
Each I/O module is identified as an “Input” or “Output”module on its front panel using the
color coding scheme listed below. See Chapter 2 for discrete I/O module specifications and
Chapter 5 for module wiring and communications. The following pages contain the analog
I/O module specifications.
There are six analog I/O modules available; four Input and 2 Output modules. The
specifications and wiring diagrams, along with configuration and signal scaling information
are in this chapter.
Use the hardware configuration tool in the Productivity Suite programming software to
setup the I/O modules. See the Productivity Suite help file for in-depth configuration and
programming concepts.
Analog Output Modules

Analog Input Modules

P1-04ADL-1

Module Type and
Part Number
(Blue: Input)

Module Type and
Part Number
(Red: Output)

24V

24V
I1+

I1+

I2+

I3+

I4+

COM

COM
COM

COM

4-20mA OUT
ANALOG

0-20mA INPUT
ANALOG

Input Type

3–2

P1-04DAL-1

1000

Output Type

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 3: Analog I/O Specifications

Analog I/O Modules
Analog Input Modules
Productivity1000 Analog Input Modules
P1-04ADL-1

24V
I1+

of
Part Number Number
Channels

Description

See Page

P1-04ADL-1

Analog Input (Current)

3–4

P1-04ADL-2

Analog Input (Voltage)

3–8

P1-04THM

Analog Thermocouple Input

3-12

P1-04NTC

Analog Thermistor Input

3–17

I2+
I3+
I4+
0V
COM
COM
COM
COM
0-20mA INPUT
ANALOG

Analog Output Modules
Productivity1000 Analog Output Modules
P1-04DAL-1

Part Number

Number of
Channels

Description

See Page

P1-04DAL-1

Analog Output (Current)

3–21

P1-04DAL-2

Analog Output (Voltage)

3–25

24V
I1+
I2+
I3+
I4+
0V
COM
COM
COM
COM
4-20mA OUT
ANALOG

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

3–3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 3: Analog I/O Specifications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

P1-04ADL-1 Analog Input
The P1-04ADL-1 Low Resolution Analog Input Module provides four current sinking
channels for converting 0–20 mA analog signals to a digital value of 0–8191 (13-bit) for use
with the Productivity1000 system.
C

UL
R

Input Specifications
Input Channels

Input Range

0–20mA

Signal Resolution

13-bit

Resolution Value of LSB
(least significant bit)

0–20mA = 2.44 μA per count
(1LSB = 1 count)

Data Range

0–8191 counts

Input Type

Sinking, Single-ended (1 common)

Maximum Continuous
Overload

±31mA

Input Impedance

247Ω, ±0.5%, 1/4W Current Input

Filter Characteristics

Low Pass, -3dB @ 120Hz

24V

Sample Duration Time

2.5 ms per channel
(Does not include ladder scan time)

I1+

All Channel Update Rate

10ms

I2+

Open Circuit Detection Time

Zero reading within 100ms

I3+

Conversion Method

Successive approximation

I4+

Accuracy vs Temperature

±75PPM / ºC maximum

Maximum Inaccuracy

0.5% of range
(including temperature drift)

Linearity Error (end to end)

±0.037% of range
Monotonic with no missing codes

P1-04ADL-1

COM
COM

Input Stability and
Repeatability
Maximum Full Scale
Calibration Error

COM
COM
0-20mA INPUT
ANALOG

Offset Calibration Error
Max Crosstalk at DC, 50Hz
and 60Hz
Recommended Fuse
(external)

Terminal block sold separately.

External DC Power Required

±0.024% of range
±0.098% of range
±0.098% of range
±0.049% of range
Edison S500-32-R, 0.032 A fuse
24VDC (-20% / + 25%), 30mA

3–4

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 3: Analog I/O Specifications

P1-04ADL-1 Analog Input (continued)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

General Specifications
Operating Temperature

0º to 60ºC (32º to 140ºF)

Storage Temperature

-20º to 70ºC (-4º to 158ºF)

Humidity

5 to 95% (non-condensing)

Environmental Air

No corrosive gases permitted

Vibration

IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc)

Shock

IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea)

Field to Logic Side
Isolation

1800VAC applied for 1 second

Insulation Resistance

>10MΩ @ 500VDC

Heat Dissipation

1200mW

Enclosure Type

Open Equipment

Module Location

Any I/O position in a Productivity1000 System

Field Wiring

Use ZIPLink Wiring System or removable terminal
block (not included). See “Wiring Options” in
Chapter 5.

EU Directive

See the “EU Directive” topic in the Productivity Suite
Help File. Information can also be obtained at:
www.productivity2000.com

Terminal Type (sold
separately)
Weight
Agency Approvals

10-position Removable Terminal Block
71g (2.5 oz)
UL 61010-2-201 file E139594, Canada & USA
CE (EN61131-2 EMC and EN61010-2-201 Safety)*

* See CE Declaration of Conformity for details.

Removable Terminal Block Specifications
Part Number

P1-10RTB

P1-10RTB-1

Number of
positions

10 Screw Terminals

10 Spring Clamp Terminals

Wire Range

30–16 AWG (0.051–1.31 mm²)
Solid / Stranded Conductor
3/64 in. (1.2 mm) Insulation Max.
1/4 in (6– 7 mm) Strip Length

28–16 AWG (0.081–1.31 mm²)
Solid / Stranded Conductor
3/64 in (1.2 mm) Insulation Max.
19/64 in (7–8 mm) Strip Length

Conductors

“USE COPPER CONDUCTORS, 75ºC” or equivalent.

Screw Driver
Screw Size

0.1 in (2.5 mm) Maximum
M2

N/A

Screw Torque

2.5 lb in (0.28 N·m)
* Recommended screw driver P/N: TW-SD-MSL-1.

1000

N/A

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

3–5

Chapter 3: Analog I/O Specifications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

P1-04ADL-1 Analog Input (continued)
Wiring Diagrams
P1-04ADL-1 Schematic

24 VDC User
Supplied Power
- +
24V

INTERNAL
MODULE CIRCUITRY

I1+
I2+
I3+
I4+
0V
COM
COM
COM
COM

ISOLATED ANALOG
CIRCUIT POWER
CH1 ADC

247Ω
247Ω

CH2 ADC

247Ω

CH3 ADC

247Ω

CH4 ADC

ISOLATED ANALOG
CIRCUIT COMMON

P1-04ADL-1 Wiring Diagram
Current Input Circuits

An Edison S500-32-R 0.032 A fast-acting
fuse is recommended for current loops.
–

fuse

I+

.032 A
+ –

2-Wire 4–20 mA
Transmitter

+24VDC User
Supplied Power

2-Wire Transmitter

COM

fuse

–

+24VDC User
Supplied Power

3-Wire Transmitter

4-Wire 4–20 mA
Transmitter
AC or DC

I+

.032 A
+

3-Wire Current
Transmitter

COM

fuse

.032 A

–

I+
COM

User Supplied
Transmitter Power

4-Wire Transmitter
Note: Do not connect both ends of shield.

3–6

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 3: Analog I/O Specifications

P1-04ADL-1 Analog Input (continued)
Module
Configuration
Module
Configuration

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Using the Hardware Configuration tool in
the Productivity Suite programming software,
drag and drop the P1-04ADL-1 module into the
configuration.
If desired, assign a User Tagname to each
input point (channel) selected and to each Status
Bit Item.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

3–7

Chapter 3: Analog I/O Specifications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

P1-04ADL-2 Analog Input
The P1-04ADL-2 Low Resolution Voltage Analog Input Module provides four channels for
converting 0–10 VDC analog signals to digital values of 0–8191 (13-bit) for use with the
Productivity1000 system.
C

UL
R

Input Specifications

P1-04ADL-2

24V
V1+
V2+
V3+
V4+
0V
COM

Input Channels

Input Range

0–10 VDC

Signal Resolution

13-bit

Resolution Value of LSB

0–10 VDC = 1.22 mV per count
(1 LSB = 1 count)

Data Range

0–8191 counts

Input Type

Single-ended (1 common)

Maximum Continuous
Overload

±100VDC

Input Impedance

>150kΩ

Hardware Filter
Characteristics

Low Pass, -3dB @ 300Hz

Sample Duration Time

2.5 ms per channel
(does not include ladder scan time)

All Channel Update Rate

10ms

Open Circuit Detection Time

Zero reading within 100ms

Conversion Method

Successive approximation

Accuracy vs Temperature

±75PPM / ºC maximum

Maximum Inaccuracy

0.5% of range
(including temperature drift)
±0.036% of range
Monotonic with no missing codes

COM

Linearity Error (end to end)

COM

Input Stability and
Repeatability
Full Scale Calibration Error
(including offset)

COM
0-10VDC INPUT
ANALOG

Offset Calibration Error
Max Crosstalk at DC,
50Hz and 60Hz
External 24VDC Power
Required

Terminal block sold separately.

±0.024% of range
±0.097% of range
±0.097% of range
±0.049% of range
24VDC (-20% / +25%), 30mA

3–8

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 3: Analog I/O Specifications

P1-04ADL-2 Analog Input (continued)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

General Specifications
Operating Temperature

0º to 60ºC (32º to 140ºF)

Storage Temperature

-20º to 70ºC (-4º to 158ºF)

Humidity

5 to 95% (non-condensing)

Environmental Air

No corrosive gases permitted

Vibration

IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc)

Shock

IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea)

Field to Logic Side
Isolation

1800VAC applied for 1 second

Insulation Resistance

>10MΩ @ 500VDC

Heat Dissipation

1200mW

Enclosure Type

Open Equipment

Module Location

Any I/O position in a Productivity1000 System

Field Wiring

Use ZIPLink Wiring System or removable terminal
block (not included). See “Wiring Options” in
Chapter 5.

EU Directive

See the “EU Directive” topic in the Productivity Suite
Help File. Information can also be obtained at:
www.productivity2000.com

Terminal Type (sold
separately)
Weight
Agency Approvals

10-position Removable Terminal Block
62g (2.2 oz)
UL 61010-2-201 file E139594, Canada & USA
CE (EN61131-2 EMC and EN61010-2-201 Safety)*

* * See CE Declaration of Conformity for details.

Removable Terminal Block Specifications
Part Number

P1-10RTB

P1-10RTB-1

Number of
positions

10 Screw Terminals

10 Spring Clamp Terminals

Wire Range

30–16 AWG (0.051–1.31 mm²)
Solid / Stranded Conductor
3/64 in. (1.2 mm) Insulation Max.
1/4 in (6– 7 mm) Strip Length

28–16 AWG (0.081–1.31 mm²)
Solid / Stranded Conductor
3/64 in (1.2 mm) Insulation Max.
19/64 in (7–8 mm) Strip Length

Conductors

“USE COPPER CONDUCTORS, 75ºC” or equivalent.

Screw Driver

0.1 in (2.5 mm) Maximum

Screw Size

N/A

Screw Torque

2.5 lb in (0.28 N·m)
* Recommended screw driver P/N: TW-SD-MSL-1.

1000

N/A

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

3–9

Chapter 3: Analog I/O Specifications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

P1-04ADL-2 Analog Input (continued)
P1-04ADL-2 Schematic
Wiring Diagrams

INTERNAL
MODULE CIRCUITRY

24 VDC User
Supplied Power
- +
24V

ISOLATED ANALOG
CIRCUIT POWER
CH1 ADC

V1+
V2+
V3+
V4+
0V
COM
COM
COM
COM

CH2 ADC
CH3 ADC
CH4 ADC

P1-04ADL-2 Wiring Diagram
Voltage Input Circuits
V+

4-Wire Voltage
Transmitter

COM

Transmitter

AC or DC
ISOLATED ANALOG
Power Supply
CIRCUIT 4-Wire
COMMON
Transmitter

P1-04ADL-2 Wiring Diagram

3-Wire Voltage +
Transmitter

Voltage Input Circuits
V+

4-Wire Voltage
Transmitter

AC or DC

COM

Transmitter
Power Supply

V+

–
3-Wire Transmitter

3–10

Notes for maximum accuracy:
1. Jumper unused inputs to common.
1000

–
3-Wire Transmitter

Notes for maximum accuracy:
1. Jumper unused inputs to common.

4-Wire Transmitter

3-Wire Voltage +
Transmitter

V+

COM
-

24 VDC User
Supplied Power

V3+

Hardware
User Manual, 1st Edition
V4+
COM

COM
-

24 VDC User
Supplied Power

V3+
V4+
COM

Chapter 3: Analog I/O Specifications

P1-04ADL-2 Analog Input (continued)
Module
Configuration
Module
Configuration

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Using the Hardware Configuration tool in
the Productivity Suite programming software,
drag and drop the P1-04ADL-2 module into the
configuration.
If desired, assign a User Tagname to each
input point (channel) selected and to each
Status Bit Item.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

3–11

Chapter 3: Analog I/O Specifications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

P1-04THM Analog Input
The P1-04THM Thermocouple Input Module provides four differential channels for receiving
thermocouple and voltage input signals for use with the Productivity1000 system.
C

UL
R

Thermocouple Input Specifications

Input Channels

4 Differential

Data Format

Floating Point

Common Mode Range

±1.25 V

Common Mode Rejection

100dB @ DC and 130dB @ 60Hz

Input Impedance

>5MΩ

Maximum Ratings

Fault protected inputs to ±50V

Resolution

16-bit, ±0.1°C or °F

Thermocouple Input Ranges

Type J -190° to 760°C (-310° to 1400°F);
Type E -210° to 1000°C (-346° to 1832°F);
Type K -150° to 1372°C (-238° to 2502°F);
Type R 65° to 1768°C (149° to 3214°F);
Type S 65° to 1768°C (149° to 3214°F);
Type T -230° to 400°C (-382° to 752°F);
Type B 529° to 1820°C (984° to 3308°F);
Type N -70° to 1300°C (-94° to 2372°F);
Type C 65° to 2320°C (149° to 4208°F);

Thermocouple Linearization

Automatic

Cold Junction Compensation

Automatic

Sample Duration Time

270ms

All Channel Update Rate

1.08 s

Open Circuit Detection Time

Within 5s

Conversion Method

Sigma-Delta

TC3-

Accuracy vs. Temperature

±50ppm per °C (maximum)

TC4+

Maximum Inaccuracy

±3°C maximum
(excluding thermocouple error).

Linearity Error

±1°C maximum (±0.5°C typical)
Monotonic with no missing codes.

Warm-up Time

30 minutes for ±1% repeatability
2 minutes to reach voltage specifications

External Power Supply
Required

None

P1-04THM

TC1+
TC1TC2+
TC2TC3+

TC4THERMOCOUPLE
INPUT

Voltage Input Specifications

Terminal Block Included. Not
Compatible with ZIPLink.
Warranty: Thirty-day moneyback guarantee. Two-year
limited replacement. (See www.
productivity1000.com for details).

3–12

1000

Linear mV Device Input Ranges

0–39.0625 mVDC,
±39.0625 mVDC,
±78.125 mVDC,
0–156.25 mVDC,
±156.25 mVDC,
0–1250 mVDC

Max Voltage Input Offset Error

0.05% @ 0°– 60°C, typical 0.04% @ 25°C

Max Voltage Input Gain Error

0.06% @ 25°C

Max Voltage Input Linearity Error

0.05% @ 0°– 60°C, typical 0.03% @ 25°C

Max Voltage Input Impedance

0.2% @ 0°– 60°C, typical 0.06% @ 25°C

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 3: Analog I/O Specifications

P1-04THM Analog Input (continued)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

General Specifications
Operating Temperature

0º to 60ºC (32º to 140ºF)

Storage Temperature

-20º to 70ºC (-4º to 158ºF)

Humidity

5 to 95% (non-condensing)

Environmental Air

No corrosive gases permitted

Vibration

IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc)

Shock

IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea)

Field to Logic Side
Isolation

1800VAC applied for 1 second

Heat Dissipation

100mW

Enclosure Type

Open Equipment

Module Location

Any I/O position in a Productivity1000 System

Field Wiring

Removable terminal block (included).
The P1-04THM module is not compatible with the
ZIPLink wiring system.

EU Directive

See the “EU Directive” topic in the Productivity
Suite Help File. Information can also be obtained
at:
www.productivity1000.com

Connector Type (Included)

10-position removable terminal block

Weight

58g (2.0 oz)

Agency Approvals

UL 61010-2-201 file E139594, Canada & USA
CE (EN61131-2 EMC and EN61010-2-201 Safety)*

* See CE Declaration of Conformity for details.

Configuration/Diagnostics
Burn-out Detection: High Side/Disable

1 bit per module

°C/°F (T/C Only)

1 bit per module

Module Diagnostics Failure

1 bit per module

Burn-out (on if T/C input is open – no
connection between TCn+ and TCn-)

1 bit per channel

Channel Under-range (T/C only)

1 bit per channel

Channel Over-range (T/C only)

1 bit per channel

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

3–13

Chapter 3: Analog I/O Specifications

Removable Terminal Block Specifications
Part Number

P1-10RTB

P1-10RTB-1

Number of
positions

10 Screw Terminals

10 Spring Clamp Terminals

Wire Range

30–16 AWG (0.051–1.31 mm²)
Solid / Stranded Conductor
3/64 in. (1.2 mm) Insulation Max.
1/4 in (6– 7 mm) Strip Length

28–16 AWG (0.081–1.31 mm²)
Solid / Stranded Conductor
3/64 in (1.2 mm) Insulation Max.
19/64 in (7–8 mm) Strip Length

Conductors

“USE COPPER CONDUCTORS, 75ºC” or equivalent.

Screw Driver

0.1 in (2.5 mm) Maximum

Screw Size

P1-04THM Schematic

Screw Torque

2.5 lb in (0.28 N·m)
* Recommended screw driver P/N: TW-SD-MSL-1.

N/A
N/A

Wiring Diagrams
INTERNAL
MODULE CIRCUITRY

3
4

CH1 T/C
INPUT
CH2 T/C
INPUT

5
6
7
8
9 10

TC3+
TC3TC4+
TC4-

TC1+
TC1TC2+
TC2-

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

P1-04THM Analog Input (continued)

CH3 T/C
INPUT
CH4 T/C
INPUT

TC+
NOTE: Install jumper wire on each unused input; TC+ to TC-.

3–14

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

TC-

Chapter 3: Analog I/O Specifications

P1-04THM Analog Input (continued)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Wiring Diagrams
Thermocouple Input Circuits
Ungrounded/Shielded
Thermocouple

TC+
TC-

Voltage Input Circuits
TC+

4-wire
Voltage
Transmitter

TC-

Transmitter
Power Supply

AC or DC

Grounded/Shielded
Thermocouple

TC+
TC-

AC or DC

Infrared
Thermocouple

TC+

Load Cell
or
Strain Gauge

TC-

Excitation
Power Supply
Voltage Divider

TC+

TC-

NOTES:
1. Connect shield to thermocouple signal/ground only. Do not connect to both ends.
TC+

2. Install jumper wire on each unused input, TC+ to TC-.

TC-

3. With grounded thermocouples, take precautions to prevent having a voltage
potential between thermocouple tips. A voltage of 1.25V or greater between tips
will skew measurements.
4. Use shielded, twisted thermocouple extension wire that matches the thermocouple
type. Use thermocouple-compatible junction blocks.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

3–15

Chapter 3: Analog I/O Specifications

P1-04THM Analog Input (continued)
1
Module
Configuration
Module
Configuration

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Using the Hardware Configuration tool in the
Productivity Suite programming software, drag and drop
the P1-04THM module into the base configuration.
Select Automatic Module Verification or No Verification.
Specify Temperature Scale and Burnout Detection, and
use the drop down menu to select module range and
resolution. If desired, assign a User Tagname to each
output point channel selected and to each Status Bit Item.

3–16

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 3: Analog I/O Specifications

P1-04NTC Thermistor
The P1-04NTC module provides four Thermistor input channels for use with the
Productivity1000 system.
C

P1-04NTC

CH1+
CH1CH2+
CH2-

UL
R

NTC Input Specifications
Input Channels

4 Single Ended (Temperature only)

Data Format

Floating Point

Common Mode Rejection

100dB @ DC

Input Impedance

>5MΩ

Maximum Ratings

Fault protected inputs to ±50V

Resolution

16-bit, ±0.1°C or °F

Thermistor Input Ranges

2252
10K-AN Type 1
10K-CP Type 2
5K
3K
1.8K

Thermistor Linearization

Automatic

Sample Duration

Dependent on digital filter settings 61ms @ 33Hz; 4ms @ 470Hz

Sample Duration Time

Per channel: 61ms @ 33Hz, 4ms @ 470Hz

All Channel Update Rate

1.2 s @ 33Hz; 300ms @ 470Hz

Open Circuit Detection Time

Within 5s @ 33Hz

Conversion Method

Sigma-Delta

Accuracy vs. Temperature

±35PPM per °C (maximum)

Maximum Inaccuracy

±1°C maximum (33Hz)
±2.5°C maximum (470Hz)
(Excluding thermistor error;
including temperature drift)

Linearity Error

±0.5°C maximum (±0.35°C typical)
Monotonic with no missing codes

Filter Characteristics

Digital filter cutoff frequencies: 33Hz, 470Hz.

External Power Supply
Required

None

CH3+
CH3CH4+
CH4THERMISTOR
INPUT

-40° to 150°C (-40° to 300°F)

Terminal Block Included.
Not Compatible with ZIPLink.
Warranty: Thirty-day money-back guarantee.
Two-year limited replacement.
(See www.productivity1000.com for details).

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

3–17

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 3: Analog I/O Specifications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

P1-04NTC Thermistor (continued)
General Specifications
Operating Temperature

0º to 60ºC (32º to 140ºF)

Storage Temperature

-20º to 70ºC (-4º to 158ºF)

Humidity

5 to 95% (non-condensing)

Environmental Air

No corrosive gases permitted

Vibration

IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc)

Shock

IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea)

Field to Logic Side
Isolation

1800VAC applied for 1 second

Heat Dissipation

100mW

Enclosure Type

Open Equipment

Module Location

Any I/O position in a Productivity1000 System

Field Wiring

Removable terminal block (included).
The P1-04NTC module is not compatible with the
ZIPLink wiring system.

EU Directive

See the “EU Directive” topic in the Productivity
Suite Help File. Information can also be obtained
at:
www.productivity1000.com

Connector Type
(included)

10-position removable terminal block

Weight

60g (2.1 oz)

Agency Approvals**

UL 61010-2-201 file E139594, Canada & USA
CE (EN61131-2 EMC and EN61010-2-201 Safety)*

* See CE Declaration of Conformity for details.

Removable Terminal Block Specifications
Part Number

P1-10RTB

P1-10RTB-1

Number of
positions

10 Screw Terminals

10 Spring Clamp Terminals

Wire Range

30–16 AWG (0.051–1.31 mm²)
Solid / Stranded Conductor
3/64 in. (1.2 mm) Insulation Max.
1/4 in (6– 7 mm) Strip Length

28–16 AWG (0.081–1.31 mm²)
Solid / Stranded Conductor
3/64 in (1.2 mm) Insulation Max.
19/64 in (7–8 mm) Strip Length

Conductors

“USE COPPER CONDUCTORS, 75ºC” or equivalent.

Screw Driver

0.1 in (2.5 mm) Maximum

Screw Size

N/A

Screw Torque

2.5 lb in (0.28 N·m)

N/A

* Recommended screw driver P/N: TW-SD-MSL-1.

3–18

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 3: Analog I/O Specifications

P1-04NTC Thermistor (continued)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

P1-04NTC Schematic
Wiring Diagrams

INTERNAL
MODULE CIRCUITRY
1

CH1+
CH1CH2+
CH2-

Ref. Adj.

Analog Switch

3
5
6

CH3+
CH3CH4+
CH4-

A to D
Converter

7
8

10 µA

P1-04NTC WiringCurrent
Diagram

9 10

Source

Thermistor Input

ANALOG CIRCUIT COMMON

CH1+

CH1-

NOTE: Install jumper wire on each unused input; CH+ to CH-.

Thermistor Input

Jumpers

CH1+

CH1-

NOTES:
1. Install jumper wire on each unused input. CH1+ to CH1-

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

3–19

Chapter 3: Analog I/O Specifications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

P1-04NTC Thermistor (continued)
Module Configuration

Module Configuration

Using the Hardware Configuration tool in the
Productivity Suite programming software, drag and drop
the P1-04NTC module into the base configuration.
Specify Temperature Scale and Burnout Detection, and
use the drop down menu to select module range and
resolution. If desired, assign a User Tagname to each
output point channel selected and to each Status Bit Item.

3–20

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 3: Analog I/O Specifications

P1-04DAL-1 Analog Output
The P1-04DAL-1 Low Resolution Analog Output Module provides four current sourcing
channels for converting a digital value of 0–4095 (12-bit) to 4–20 mA analog signals for use
with the Productivity1000 system.
C

UL
R

Output Specifications
Output Channels

Output Range

4–20mA

Signal Resolution
Resolution Value of LSB
(least significant bit)
Data Range

12-bit
4–20mA = 3.9 μA / count
1 LSB = 1 count
0 to 4095 counts

Output Type (sourcing)

Current sourcing at 20mA max

Output Value in Fault Mode

Less than 4mA

Load Impedance

0–570Ω (19.2 VDC),
0–690Ω (21.6 VDC),
0–810Ω (24VDC),
0–930Ω (26.4 VDC),
0–1100Ω (30.0 VDC),
Minimum Load: 0Ω @ 0–45°C
125Ω @ 45–60°C ambient temperature

Maximum Inductive Load

1mH

Allowed Load Type

Grounded

I2+

Maximum Inaccuracy

1% of range

I3+

Maximum Full Scale Calibration Error
(Including Offset)

±0.2% of range minimum

Maximum Offset Calibration Error

±0.2% of range maximum

COM

Accuracy vs. Temperature

COM

±75PPM / °C maximum full-scale
calibration change
(±0.005% of range / °C)

Max Crosstalk at DC, 50/60Hz

-72dB, 1 LSB

Linearity Error (End to End)

±4 counts max., (±0.1% of full scale)

Output Stability and Repeatability

±2 count after 10 min. warm up (typical)

Output Ripple

±0.2% of full scale

Output Settling Time

0.3 ms max., 5µs min. (full scale range)

All Channel Update Rate

2ms (max)

Maximum Continuous Overload

Outputs open circuit protected
Electronically current limited to 20mA
or less

P1-04DAL-1

24V
I1+

I4+
0V

COM
COM
4-20mA OUT
ANALOG

Terminal block sold separately.

Type of Output Protection
Output Signal at Power Up
and Power Down
External Power Supply Required

4mA
24VDC (-20% / +25%),140mA
(Loop power included)

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

3–21

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 3: Analog I/O Specifications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

P1-04DAL-1 Analog Output (continued)
General Specifications
Operating Temperature

0º to 60ºC (32º to 140ºF)

Storage Temperature

-20º to 70ºC (-4º to 158ºF)

Humidity

5 to 95% (non-condensing)

Environmental Air

No corrosive gases permitted

Vibration

IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc)

Shock

IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea)

Field to Logic Side
Isolation

1800VAC applied for 1 second

Insulation Resistance

>10MΩ @ 500VDC

Heat Dissipation

2000mW Maximum

Enclosure Type

Open Equipment

Module Location

Any I/O position in a Productivity1000 System

Field Wiring

Use ZIPLink Wiring System or removable terminal
block (not included). See “Wiring Options” in
Chapter 5.

EU Directive

See the “EU Directive” topic in the Productivity Suite
Help File. Information can also be obtained at:
www.productivity2000.com

Terminal Type
(sold separately)

10-position Removable Terminal Block

Weight

85.1 g (3.0 oz)

Agency Approvals

UL 61010-2-201 file E139594, Canada & USA
CE (EN61131-2 EMC and EN61010-2-201 Safety)*

* See CE Declaration of Conformity for details.

Removable Terminal Block Specifications
Part Number

P1-10RTB

P1-10RTB-1

Number of
positions

10 Screw Terminals

10 Spring Clamp Terminals

Wire Range

30–16 AWG (0.051–1.31 mm²)
Solid / Stranded Conductor
3/64 in. (1.2 mm) Insulation Max.
1/4 in (6– 7 mm) Strip Length

28–16 AWG (0.081–1.31 mm²)
Solid / Stranded Conductor
3/64 in (1.2 mm) Insulation Max.
19/64 in (7–8 mm) Strip Length

Conductors

“USE COPPER CONDUCTORS, 75ºC” or equivalent.

Screw Driver

0.1 in (2.5 mm) Maximum

Screw Size

N/A

Screw Torque

2.5 lb in (0.28 N·m)

N/A

* Recommended screw driver P/N: TW-SD-MSL-1.

3–22

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 3: Analog I/O Specifications

P1-04DAL-1 Analog Output (continued)
P1-04DAL-1 Schematic

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Wiring Diagrams

INTERNAL
MODULE CIRCUITRY

24VDC User
Supplied Power
+

4–20 mA current sourcing

ISOLATED ANALOG
CIRCUIT POWER

CH1 DAC
CH2 DAC
CH3 DAC
CH4 DAC

6
7
8
9

0V
COM
COM
COM
COM

I+1
I+2
I+3
I+4

ISOLATED ANALOG
CIRCUIT COMMON

Current Source Output Circuit

4 - 20mA
Load

Note: Shield is connected to common at the source device.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

3–23

Chapter 3: Analog I/O Specifications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

P1-04DAL-1 Analog Output (continued)
Module
Configuration
Module
Configuration

Using the Hardware Configuration tool in the
Productivity Suite programming software, drag
and drop the P1-04DAL-1 module into the base
configuration.
If desired, assign a User Tagname to each
output point channel selected and to each
Status Bit Item. A Stop Mode Value may also
be assigned.

3–24

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 3: Analog I/O Specifications

P1-04DAL-2 Analog Output
The P1-04DAL-2 Low Resolution Voltage Analog Output Module provides four outputs for
converting digital values from 0–4095 (12-bit) to 0–10 VDC analog signals for use with the
Productivity1000 system.
C

UL
R

P1-04DAL-2

Output Specifications
Output Channels
Module Signal Input Range

4
0–10V

Output Signal Resolution

Data Range

12-bit
0–10V = 2.44 mV per count
1 LSB = 1 count
0 to 4095 counts

Output Type

Voltage sourcing at 10mA

Output Value in Fault Mode

Load Impedance

≥1000Ω

Maximum Capacitive Load

0.01 µF

Allowed Load Type

Grounded

Maximum Inaccuracy
Maximum Full Scale Calibration
Error
(Not Including Offset)
Maximum Offset Calibration Error

0.5% of range

Resolution Value of LSB
(least significant bit)

24V
V1+
V2+

Accuracy vs. Temperature

V3+

Max Crosstalk

V4+

±0.2% of range
±0.2% of range
±75PPM / °C maximum full-scale
calibration change
(±0.0025% of range / °C)
-72dB, 1 LSB

Linearity Error (End to End)

±4 LSB maximum, (±0.1% of full scale)
Monotonic with no missing codes

COM

Output Stability and Repeatability

COM

Output Ripple

COM

±2% LSB after 10 min. warm up
(typical)
±0.2% of full scale

Output Settling Time

0.3 ms max., 5µs min. (full scale range)

COM

All Channel Update Rate (typical)

2ms
Outputs current limited to 40mA typical
Continuous overloads on multiple
outputs can damage the module.
0.1 µF Transient Suppressor

0-10VDC OUT
ANALOG

Terminal block sold separately.

Maximum Continuous Overload
Type of Output Protection
Output Signal at Power Up and
Power Down
External Power Supply Required

0V
24VDC (-20% / +25%), 100mA

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

3–25

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 3: Analog I/O Specifications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

P1-04DAL-2 Analog Output (continued)
General Specifications
Operating Temperature

0º to 60ºC (32º to 140ºF)

Storage Temperature

-20º to 70ºC (-4º to 158ºF)

Humidity

5 to 95% (non-condensing)

Environmental Air

No corrosive gases permitted

Vibration

IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc)

Shock

IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea)

Field to Logic Side Isolation

1800VAC applied for 1 second

Insulation Resistance

>10MΩ @ 500VDC

Heat Dissipation

2000mW

Enclosure Type

Open Equipment

Module Location

Any I/O position in a Productivity1000 System

Field Wiring

Use ZIPLink Wiring System or removable terminal
block (sold separately). See “Wiring Options” in
Chapter 5.

EU Directive

See the “EU Directive” topic in the Productivity Suite
Help File. Information can also be obtained at:
www.productivity1000.com

Connector Type (Not included)

10-position removable terminal block

Weight

62g (2.2 oz)

Agency Approvals

UL 61010-2-201 file E139594, Canada & USA
CE (EN61131-2 EMC and EN61010-2-201 Safety)*

* See CE Declaration of Conformity for details.

Removable Terminal Block Specifications
Part Number

P1-10RTB

P1-10RTB-1

Number of
positions

10 Screw Terminals

10 Spring Clamp Terminals

Wire Range

30–16 AWG (0.051–1.31 mm²)
Solid / Stranded Conductor
3/64 in. (1.2 mm) Insulation Max.
1/4 in (6– 7 mm) Strip Length

28–16 AWG (0.081–1.31 mm²)
Solid / Stranded Conductor
3/64 in (1.2 mm) Insulation Max.
19/64 in (7–8 mm) Strip Length

Conductors

“USE COPPER CONDUCTORS, 75ºC” or equivalent.

Screw Driver

0.1 in (2.5 mm) Maximum

Screw Size

N/A

Screw Torque

2.5 lb in (0.28 N·m)

N/A

* Recommended screw driver P/N: TW-SD-MSL-1.

3–26

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 3: Analog I/O Specifications

P1-04DAL-2 Schematic

P1-04DAL-2 Analog Output (continued)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Wiring Diagrams

INTERNAL
MODULE CIRCUITRY
ISOLATED ANALOG
CIRCUIT POWER
CH1 DAC

1
2

voltage source

CH2 DAC
CH3 DAC
CH4 DAC

6
7
8

24VDC User
Supplied
Power

24V
V1+
V2+
V3+
V4+
0V
COM
COM
COM
COM

ISOLATED ANALOG
CIRCUIT COMMON

Voltage Output Circuits
V+
0 - 10
VDC Load

COM

Load
Power Supply

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

3–27

Chapter 3: Analog I/O Specifications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Module
Configuration
P1-04DAL-2
Analog
Output (continued)
Module Configuration
Using the Hardware Configuration tool in the
Productivity Suite programming software, drag
and drop the P1-04DAL-2 module into the base
configuration.
If desired, assign a User Tagname to each
output point channel selected and to each
Status Bit Item. A Stop Mode Value may also
be assigned.

3–28

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Specialty Module
Specifications

Chapter

Reserved For Future Release

Chapter 4: Specialty Module Specifications

Notes

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
4–2

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Installation and
Wiring

Chapter

In This Chapter...
Safety Guidelines........................................................................................................ 5–2
Introduction to the Productivity1000 Mechanical Design........................................ 5–5
Dimensions and Installation....................................................................................... 5–6
Mounting Guidelines.................................................................................................. 5–9
Wiring Guidelines..................................................................................................... 5–15
I/O Module Wiring Options..................................................................................... 5–17
System Wiring Strategies......................................................................................... 5–23

Chapter 5: Installation and Wiring

A
2
3
4
5
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Safety Guidelines
NOTE: Products with CE marks perform their required functions safely and adhere to relevant standards
as specified by CE directives provided they are used according to their intended purpose and that the
instructions in this manual are adhered to. The protection provided by the equipment may be impaired if this
equipment is used in a manner not specified in this manual. A listing of our international affiliates is available
on our Web site at http://www.automationdirect.com.
WARNING: Providing a safe operating environment for personnel and equipment is your responsibility
and should be your primary goal during system planning and installation. Automation systems can fail
and may result in situations that can cause serious injury to personnel or damage to equipment. Do not
rely on the automation system alone to provide a safe operating environment. You should use external
electromechanical devices, such as relays or limit switches, that are independent of the CPU application
to provide protection for any part of the system that may cause personal injury or damage. Every
automation application is different, so there may be special requirements for your particular application.
Make sure you follow all national, state, and local government requirements for the proper installation
and use of your equipment.

Plan for Safety
The best way to provide a safe operating environment is to make personnel and equipment
safety part of the planning process. You should examine every aspect of the system to determine
which areas are critical to operator or machine safety. If you are not familiar with CPU system
installation practices, or your company does not have established installation guidelines, you
should obtain additional information from the following sources.
• NEMA — The National Electrical Manufacturers Association, located in Washington, D.C.,
publishes many different documents that discuss standards for industrial control systems. You can
order these publications directly from NEMA. Some of these include:
ICS 1, General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems
ICS 3, Industrial Systems
ICS 6, Enclosures for Industrial Control Systems
• NEC — The National Electrical Code provides regulations concerning the installation and use of
various types of electrical equipment. Copies of the NEC Handbook can often be obtained from
your local electrical equipment distributor or your local library.
• Local and State Agencies — many local governments and state governments have additional
requirements above and beyond those described in the NEC Handbook. Check with your local
Electrical Inspector or Fire Marshall office for information.

5–2

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 5: Installation and Wiring

Three Levels of Protection
WARNING: The control program must not be the only form of
protection for any problems that may result in a risk of personal
injury or equipment damage.

The publications mentioned provide many ideas and
requirements for system safety. At a minimum, you should
follow these regulations. Also, you should use the following
techniques, which provide three levels of system control.
1. Orderly system shutdown sequence in the CPU control
program.

Jam
Detect

Turn off
Saw
RST

2. Mechanical disconnect for output module power.
3. Emergency stop switch for disconnecting system power.

RST
Retract
Arm

Orderly System Shutdown
The first level of fault detection is ideally the CPU control program, which can identify machine
problems. Certain shutdown sequences should be performed. These types of problems are
usually things such as jammed parts, etc. that do not pose a risk of personal injury or equipment
damage.

System Power Disconnect
You should also use electromechanical devices, such as master control relays and/or limit
switches, to prevent accidental equipment startup at an unexpected time. These devices should
be installed in a manner that will prevent any machine operations from occurring.
For example, if the machine in the illustration has a jammed part, the CPU control program
can turn off the saw blade and retract the arbor. If the operator must open the guard to remove
the part, you should also include a bypass switch that disconnects all system power any time
the guard is opened.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

5–3

A
2
3
4
5
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Chapter 5: Installation and Wiring

Emergency Stop Circuits
Emergency stop (E-Stop) circuits are a critical part of automation safety. For each machine
controlled by a CPU, provide an emergency stop device that is wired outside the CPU and
easily accessed by the machine operator.
E-Stop devices are commonly wired through a master control relay (MCR) or a safety control
relay (SCR) that will remove power from the CPU I/O system in an emergency.
MCRs and SCRs provide a convenient means for removing power from the I/O system
during an emergency situation. By de-energizing an MCR (or SCR) coil, power to the input
(optional) and output devices is removed. This event occurs when any emergency stop switch
opens. However, the CPU continues to receive power and operate even though all its inputs
and outputs are disabled.
The MCR circuit could be extended by placing a CPU fault relay (closed during normal
CPU operation) in series with any other emergency stop conditions. This would cause
the MCR circuit to drop the CPU I/O power in case of a CPU failure (memory error, I/O
communications error, etc.).

A
2
3
4
5
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

ENCY

EMERG
STOP

Guard
Limit
Switch
L1

Use E-Stop and Master
Maste Control Relay
E-Stop

Power On

Limit
S
Switch

Master
Control
Relay (MCR)

MCR

CR1

Saw Arbor

WARNING: For some applications, field device power may still be present on the terminal block even
though the CPU is turned off. To minimize the risk of electrical shock, remove all field device power
before you expose or remove CPU wiring.

5–4

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 5: Installation and Wiring

Introduction to the Productivity1000 Mechanical Design
The Productivity1000 is a modular system that allows expansion by means of directly
connecting additional modules to the CPU. Each Productivity1000 system requires one
CPU module. Connect any I/O module combination (up to 8 modules) to the right of the
CPU without power budget or module type restrictions.

Typical Productivity1000 System
Base Mounting Tabs
I/O Modules (Output)

DIN Rail
Mounting
Slot
Power Supply

CPU

I/O Modules (Input)
ZIPLink Wiring
System

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

5–5

A
2
3
4
5
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Chapter 5: Installation and Wiring

A
2
3
4
5
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Dimensions and Installation
Before installing the CPU system you will need to know the dimensions of the components
considered. These diagrams provide the dimensions to use in defining your enclosure
specifications. Remember to leave room for module insertion and/or replacement and for
potential expansion. If you are using other components in your system, refer to the appropriate
manual to determine how those units can affect mounting dimensions.
The height and depth dimension is the same for all modules. The width varies depending
on your choice of I/O module. Productivity1000 is designed to be mounted on standard
35mm DIN rail, or it may be surface mounted. Make sure you have followed the installation
guidelines for proper spacing.
NOTE: Dimensional drawings for the CPU, power supply and all modules are available on the
AutomationDirect.com site.

Module

Productivity1000 Component Dimensions
Dimensions
Description

P1-540

CPU

32.8 [1.89]

P1-01AC

AC/DC Power Supply

35.0 [1.38]

P1-08SIM

Simulator Input

P1-08ND3

Sinking/Sourcing 12–24 VDC Input

P1-08TD1

Sinking Output

P1-08TD2

Sourcing Output

P1-08TRS

Isolated Relay Output

P1-16TR

Relay Output

P1-15CDD1

Input: Sinking/Sourcing;
Output: Sinking

P1-15CDD2

Input: Sinking/Sourcing;
Output: Sourcing

P1-16CDR

5–6

Height
Width
mm [in] Faceplate
mm [in]

Discrete Relay Combo Module

1000

Height
w/Tabs
mm [in]

Depth
mm [in]

92.8 [3.65]

86.6 [3.41]

17.2 [0.58]

77.0 [3.03]
26.2 [1.03]

17.2 [0.58]

26.2 [1.03]

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 5: Installation and Wiring

P1-01AC

A
2
3
4
5
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

P1-540

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

5–7

Chapter 5: Installation and Wiring

A
2
3
4
5
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

I/O Modules

5–8

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 5: Installation and Wiring

Mounting Guidelines
Enclosures
Your selection of a proper enclosure is important to ensure safe and proper operation of your
Productivity1000 system. Applications for the Productivity1000 system vary and may require
additional hardware considerations. The minimum considerations for enclosures include:
• Conformance to electrical standards
• Protection from the elements in an industrial
environment

2ʺ

• Common ground reference
NOTE: Add 2ʺ to mounting
depth when using ZIPLink
cable.

• Maintenance of specified ambient temperature
• Access to the equipment
• Security or restricted access
• Sufficient space for proper installation and maintenance
of the equipment

Mounting Position
Mount the CPU and expansion modules horizontally, as shown in the illustration on the
following page, to provide proper ventilation. Do not mount vertically, upside down, or on a
flat horizontal surface.

Airflow

Grounding
A sound common ground reference (earth ground) is essential for proper operation of the
Productivity1000 system. One side of all control circuits and power circuits along with the
ground lead must be properly connected to earth ground (earthing) by either installing a ground
rod in close proximity to the enclosure or by connecting to the incoming power system ground.
There must be a single-point ground (i.e. copper bus bar) for all devices in the enclosure that
require an earth ground.
Ground Braid
Copper Lugs
Panel or
Single Point
Ground

Panel

Star Washers
1000

Star Washers

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

5–9

A
2
3
4
5
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Chapter 5: Installation and Wiring

Mounting Clearances

A
2
3
4
5
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Provide a minimum clearance of 2 inches (50mm) on all sides of the module(s). Allow extra
door clearance for operator panels and other door mounted items. There should be a minimum
of 3 inches (76mm) clearance between the module(s) and any wire duct, and a minimum of 7.2
inches (183mm) from chassis to chassis in a multiple unit installation.

2”
50mm
min

3”
76mm
min

7.2”
18
183mm
min

3”
76mm
min

2”
50mm
min

Temperature Considerations
The Productivity1000 system enclosure should be installed in an environment which is within
the specified equipment operating temperature. If the environment temperature deviates above
or below the specification, measures such as cooling or heating the enclosure should be taken to
maintain the specification.

Power Considerations
The Productivity1000 system is designed to be powered by 110/240 VAC or 125VDC power
supply. The Productivity1000 has achieved CE certification without requiring EMF/RFI line
noise filters on the AC power supply. Please review the European Union (CE) material in
Appendix A for more information.

5–10

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 5: Installation and Wiring
In addition to the panel layout guidelines, other specifications can affect the installation of a
CPU system. Always consider the following:
• Environmental Specifications
• Power Requirements
• Agency Approvals
• Enclosure Selection and Component Dimensions
WARNING: Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off or the area is known to be
non–hazardous.

Agency Approvals
Some applications require agency approvals for particular components. The Productivity1000
CPU agency approvals are listed below:
• UL (Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc.)
• CUL (Canadian Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc.)
• CE (European Economic Union)
NOTE: See the “EU Directives(CE)” in Appendix A in this manual for more information.

Using Mounting Rails
The Productivity1000 modules can be secured to the cabinet using mounting rails. You
should use rails that conform to DIN EN standard 50022. We offer a complete line of DIN
rail, DINnectors and DIN rail mounted apparatus. These rails are approximately 35mm high,
with a depth of 7.5 mm. If you mount the module(s) on a DIN rail, you should also consider
using end brackets on each side of the base. The end brackets keep the module(s) from sliding
horizontally along the rail, thus minimizing the possibility of accidentally pulling the wiring
loose.
End Bracket (Part No. DN-EB35)
DIN Rail
Dimensions
7.5 mm

35 mm

DIN Rail (Part No. DN-R35S1)

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

5–11

A
2
3
4
5
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Module Installation

NING: Do not add or remove

es with field power
applied.
Chapter

One: With latch
ed” position, align
tors on the side of
module and stack
essing together.
ndicates lock is
d.

5: Installation and Wiring

Installing the Power Supply
P1-540

A WARNING:
NOTE: Removable
power connector
be removed prior
to performingwith
this step.
DoDC not
add ormustremove
modules
2 field Step
power
One:applied.
3
latch
Step
One: With
Module
Installation
4 To unstack
modules, pull locking
Two:
into the unlocked
position and then pull
in “locked”
position, align
s apart.
5
connectors on the
sideDoof
WARNING:
not add or remove
modules with field power applied.
3 each module and stack
Step One: With latch
“locked” position, align
together.
3 by pressing inconnectors
on the side of
each module and stack
Click
indicates
lock
is
by pressing together.
3
Click indicates lock is
engaged.
engaged.
3
Step Two:
3
3
Step Two: To unstack modules, pull locking
latch up into the unlocked position and then pull
modules apart.
3 Step Two: Attach
field wiring using
secure after modul
are connected.
3 the removable terminal block or ZIPLink
3 wiring system.
3
3
WARNING: Explosion hazard – Do not connect, disconnect or operate switches while circuit is live unless
3
the area is known to be non-hazardous. Do not hot swap.
3
AC (L)
DC (+V)
AC (N)
DC (-V)

LOCK

UNLOCK

With latch in “locked” position, align
connectors on the side of each module
and stack by pressing together. An
audible click indicates lock is engaged.

P1-540

AC (L)
DC (+V)
AC (N)
DC (-V)

LOCK

UNLOCK

To unstack modules, pull locking latch up
into the unlocked position and then pull
modules apart.

P1-08TD1

5–12

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 5: Installation and Wiring

DIN Rail Mounting P1000 System
If you examine the module(s), you’ll notice retaining clips. To secure the module(s) to a DIN
rail, place the module(s) onto the rail and gently push up on the retaining clips. The clips lock
the module onto the rail. To remove the module(s), pull down on the retaining clips, slightly
lift up the base, and pull it away from the rail.
This installation procedure applies to the P1-540 CPU module with power supply.
Step 1: Rotate unit upwards as you engage rear
DIN rail slot (image at right). Once engaged, rotate
unit downwards, firmly pressing into DIN rail. A
noticeable click affirms the unit is secure to DIN rail.

Push up
retaining clips

Step 2: Ensure all retaining clips are pushed up into
DIN rail.
Install end brackets on either side of unit to ensure unit
will not slide along the DIN rail.

Surface Mounting P1000 System
The P1000 system may be surface mounted as well.
Extend the lower tabs for ease of access. Use mounting
holes in top and bottom tabs to secure the unit to
panel surface.

Extend lower tabs to
install hardware for
surface mount
installation.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

5–13

A
2
3
4
5
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Chapter 5: Installation and Wiring

Module Installation

Installing the I/O Modules
Step One:
With latch in “locked” position, align
connectors on the side of Do
eachnot
module
add
and stack by pressing together. An
field
power
applied.
audible click indicates lock is engaged.

WARNING:

or remove modules with

Step One: With latch

in “locked” position, align
connectors on the side of
each module and stack
by pressing together.
Click indicates lock is
engaged.

Step Two:

Attachlatch
field
secure after modules
To unstack modules, pull locking
up wiring using
or operate switches while circuit is live.
are connected.
into thethe
unlocked
position and
then pull
removable
terminal
block or ZIPLink modules
Productivity1000 System does not support Hot Swapping!
modules apart.
WARNING: Explosion hazard – Do not connect, disconnect

wiring system.

P1-08TD1

WIRE STRIP
LENGTH
MAX
MIN

Step Three: To unstack modules, pull

5–14

1000

LOCK

locking latch up into the unlocked position
and then pull modules apart.
UNLOCK

A
2
3
4
5
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 5: Installation and Wiring

Wiring Guidelines
Wiring Power Supply
Connect the AC power source input wiring to the power supply as shown. The power supply
terminals can accept up to 14 AWG solid or stranded wire. Do not over tighten the terminal
screws; the recommended torque is 7 to 9 inch-pounds (0.882 to 1.02 N·m).
WARNING: Once the power wiring is connected, secure the terminal block cover in the closed position.
When the cover is open there is a risk of electrical shock if you accidentally touch the connection
terminals or power wiring.

Grounding
A good common ground reference (earth ground) is essential for proper operation of the
Productivity1000 system. One side of all control circuits and power circuits along with the
ground lead must be properly connected to earth ground by either installing a ground rod in
close proximity to the enclosure or by connecting to the incoming power system ground. There
must be a single-point ground (i.e. copper bus bar) for all devices in the enclosure that require an
earth ground.

Power Hookup

P1-01AC

P1-01AC
®

100-240V 48VA
50-60Hz
125VDC, 20W

AC (L)
DC (+V)
AC (N)
DC (-V)
G
LG

125VDC

100–240 VAC
+V

AC (L)

-V

AC (N)

GND

LOGIC
GND

Grounding
A good common ground reference
is essential
for Manual,
proper operation
of
1000 (earth ground)
Hardware
User
1st Edition
the Productivity1000 system. One side of all control circuits, power circuits and the

5–15

A
2
3
4
5
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Chapter 5: Installation and Wiring

Fuse Protection
Some of the Input and Output I/O module circuits do not have internal fuses. In order to
protect your modules, we suggest you add external fuses to your I/O wiring. A fast-blow fuse
with a lower current rating than the I/O bank’s common current rating can be wired to each
common; or a fuse with a rating of slightly less than the maximum current per output point
can be added to each output. Refer to the I/O module specifications in Chapter 2 to find the
maximum current per output point or per output common. Adding the external fuse does not
guarantee the prevention of CPU damage, but it will provide added protection.

A
2
3
4
5
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
5–16

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 5: Installation and Wiring

I/O Module Wiring Options
There are two available methods for wiring most I/O modules: Hand wiring to the optional
removable I/O module terminal blocks or using the ZIPLink wiring system.
NOTE: Thermocouple and Thermistor modules are not compatible with the ZIPLink system and are shipped
with the terminal blocks included.

Hand Wiring System
Field wiring is attached using the removable terminal block connector. Use Wire Strip Length
reference on the terminal block, as a guide when preparing wire for termination. For easier
assembly, wire may be connected to terminal block prior to installing block into expansion
module.

P1-08TD1

WIRE STRIP
LENGTH
MAX
MIN

e: To unstack modules, pull
into the unlocked position
odules apart.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

5–17

A
2
3
4
5
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Chapter 5: Installation and Wiring

A
2
3
4
5
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

I/O Module Wiring Options
ZIPLink Wiring System
The ZIPLink wiring system is the recommended method, which allows quick and easy
connection using cables that are prewired to the I/O module terminals at one end and plug into
a ZIPLink connector module terminal block at the other end. Use the tables on the following
page to specify your ZIPLink wiring system.
ZIPLink Wiring
System

ZIPLink Pre-Wired Cables

Terminal Block With Pigtail Cable
For most I/O modules you can also purchase ZIPLink pigtail cables.

ZIPLink Pigtail Cable

5–18

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

ZIPLink Module

Chapter 5: Installation and Wiring

Input and Output Modules ZIPLink Selections

A
2
3
4
5
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Productivity1000 Input Module ZIPLink Selector
I/O Module
ZIPLink
Input
Module
P1-08ND3

# of Terms Component
10

Feedthrough

Module Part No. Cable Part No.
ZL-RTB20 or
ZL-RTB20-1

ZL-P1-CBL10*

Productivity1000 Output Module ZIPLink Selector
I/O Module
ZIPLink
Output
Module
P1-08TD1
P1-08TD2
P1-08TRS
P1-16TR

# of Terms Component

Module Part No. Cable Part No.

Feedthrough

ZL-RTB20 or
ZL-RTB20-1

ZL-P1-CBL10*

Feedthrough

ZL-RTB20 or
ZL-RTB20-1

ZL-P1-CBL18*

Productivity1000 Combo Modules ZIPLink Selector
I/O Module
ZIPLink
Output
Module

# of Terms Component

Module Part No. Cable Part No.

P1-15CDD1
P1-15CDD2

Feedthrough

P1-16CDR

ZL-RTB20 or
ZL-RTB20-1

ZL-P1-CBL18*

*S
elect the cable length by replacing the * with: Blank = 0.5 m, -1 = 1.0 m,
or -2 = 2.0 m.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

5–19

Chapter 5: Installation and Wiring

Analog Modules ZIPLink Selections

A
2
3
4
5
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Productivity1000 Analog Module ZIPLink Selector
Module
Analog Module

ZIPLink

# of Terms

P1-04ADL-1

Component

P1-04ADL-2

Feedthrough

T/C Wire
Only
Copper
Conductors

P1-04THM
P1-04NTC

Module

Cable

ZL-RTB20 or
ZL-RTB20-1

ZL-P1-CBL10*

ZL-RTB20 or
ZL-RTB20-1

ZL-P1-CBL10*

See Note 1
See Note 1

P1-04DAL-1

Feedthrough

P1-04DAL-2

Feedthrough

* Select the cable length by replacing the * with: Blank = 0.5 m, -1 = 1.0 m, or -2 = 2.0 m.
1. These modules are not supported by the ZIPLink wiring system.

Productivity1000 Specialty Modules ZIPLink Selector
Module
Input Module

ZIPLink

# of Terms

Component

P1-08SIM

Module

Cable

See Note 1

Removable Terminal Blocks (Optional)
The hand wiring method consists of purchasing the associated removable I/O module terminal
block (table below) and hand wiring from the I/O terminal block to a DIN rail mounted
terminal block.

Removable Terminal Block Specifications
Part Number

P2-RTB

P2-RTB-1

P1-10RTB

P1-10RTB-1

Number of
positions

18 Screw Terminals

18 Spring Clamp Terminals

10 Screw Terminals

10 Spring Clamp Terminals

Wire Range

30–16 AWG
(0.051– 1.31 mm²)
Solid / Stranded Conductor
3/64 in. (1.2 mm) Insulation
Maximum
Strip Length:
1/4 in. (6–7 mm)

28–16 AWG
(0.081–1.31 mm²)
Solid / Stranded Conductor
3/64 in. (1.2 mm) Insulation
Maximum
Strip Length:
19/64 in. (7–8 mm)

30–16 AWG
(0.051–1.31 mm²)
Solid / Stranded Conductor
3/64 in. (1.2 mm) Insulation
Maximum
Strip Length:
1/4 in. (6–7 mm)

28-16 AWG
(0.081–1.31 mm²)
Solid / Stranded Conductor
3/64 in. (1.2 mm)
Insulation Maximum
Strip Length:
19/64 in. (7–8 mm)

Conductors

“USE COPPER CONDUCTORS, 75°C” or Equivalent.

Screw Driver
Width

0.1 in (2.5 mm) Maximum *

Screw Size

N/A

Screw Torque

2.5 lb·in (0.28 N·m)

N/A

2.5 lb·in (0.28 N·m)

N/A

* Select Automationdirect Screwdriver P/N TW-SD-MSL-1

5–20

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 5: Installation and Wiring

Removable Terminal Blocks, continued

P1-10RTB (screw terminals)
Removable Terminal Block

P1-10RTB-1 (spring-clip terminals)
Removable Terminal Block

P2-RTB (screw terminals)
Removable Terminal Block

P2-RTB-1 (spring-clip terminals)
Removable Terminal Block

Terminal Block Installation
WIRE STRIP
LENGTH

Reference the Wire Strip Length gauge printed on the end of the terminal strip as a guide to
properly strip wire insulation prior to inserting into terminal block. For ease of assembly, block
maybe wired prior to installation, if desired.
Insert terminal block as follows:
Step 1: Raise finger-safe terminal guard.
Step 2: Align terminal block with module terminal pins, ensuring correct orientation of
block.
Step 3: Firmly and evenly press terminal block onto terminal pins until seated. Lower fingersafe guard into place.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

5–21

A
2
3
4
5
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Chapter 5: Installation and Wiring

Terminal Block Removal

A
2
3
4
5
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

WARNING: Ensure local and remote power supplies have been disconnected prior to removing terminal
block.

Remove terminal block as follows:
Step 1: Raise terminal cover.

Terminal Cover

Step 2: Pull terminal block release lever forward.
This will lift terminal block away from
pins.
Step 2: Grasp block firmly and pull away from
module.
Terminal Release Lever

Planning the I/O Wiring Routes
The following guidelines provide general information on how to wire the I/O connections to
Productivity1000 modules. For specific information on wiring a particular I/O module refer
to the module specifications in Chapter 2.
1. If using removable terminal blocks, follow the wire size guidelines in the I/O modules
specifications in Chapter 2.
2. Always use a continuous length of wire. Do not splice wires to attain a needed length.
3. Use the shortest possible wire length.
4. Use wire trays for routing where possible.
5. Avoid running low voltage control wires near high voltage wiring.
6. Avoid confusion by laying input wiring separate from output wiring where possible.
7. To minimize voltage drops when wires must run a long distance, consider using multiple
wires for the return line.
8. Avoid running DC wiring in close proximity to AC wiring where possible.
9. Avoid creating sharp bends in the wires; follow accepted Electrical Code standards.

5–22

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 5: Installation and Wiring

System Wiring Strategies
The Productivity1000 system is very flexible and will work in many different wiring configurations. By
studying this section before actual installation, you may find the best wiring strategy for your application.
This will help to lower system cost and wiring errors, and avoid safety problems.

CPU Isolation Boundaries
CPU circuitry is divided into three main regions separated by isolation boundaries, shown
in the drawing below. Electrical isolation provides safety, so that a fault in one area does not
damage another. The transformer in the power supply provides magnetic isolation between
the primary and secondary sides. Optical isolators provide isolation in Input and Output
circuits. This isolates logic circuitry from the field side, where factory machinery connects.
The discrete inputs are isolated from the discrete outputs because each is isolated from the
logic side. Isolation boundaries protect the devices which are connected to the communication
ports, such as PCs and HMIs, from power input faults or field wiring faults. When wiring a
CPU, it is extremely important to avoid making external connections that connect logic side
circuits to any other.

PC, HMI, or other
communication devices

Power Supply

CPU Module

Power
Input

Input Module

Output Module

Logic
Circuit

Input
Circuit

Output
Circuit

Filter
Optional
Logic Circuit

Com
Ports

Isolation Boundary

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

5–23

A
2
3
4
5
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Chapter 5: Installation and Wiring

Sinking/Sourcing Concepts
Before wiring field devices to the CPU I/O, it’s necessary to have a basic understanding of
“sinking” and “sourcing” concepts. Use of these terms occurs frequently in input or output
circuit discussions. These terms only apply to DC circuits, not AC circuits. The purpose of
this section is to explain the terms. The short definitions are as follows:

A
2
3
4
5
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Sinking = Path to supply ground (–) or switching ground.
Sourcing = Path to supply source (+) or switching +V.

Input and output points that are either sinking or sourcing can conduct current in only one
direction. This means it is possible to wire the external supply and field device to the I/O
point with current trying to flow in the wrong direction, in which case the circuit will not
operate.
The diagram on the left shows a “sinking” CPU input.
CPU
Input
To properly connect the external supply, connect it so
(sinking)
that the input provides a path to ground (–). Start
+
at the CPU input terminal, follow through the input
Input
sensing circuit, exit at the common terminal, and
Sensing
–
connect the supply (–) to the common terminal.
Common
The switch between the supply (+) and the input
completes the circuit. Current flows in the direction
of the arrow when the switch is closed. By applying the circuit principle above to the four
possible combinations of input/output sinking/sourcing types, we have the four circuits as
shown below.
Sinking Input

Sinking Output
Input

CPU

Output

Load

+
–

+
Common

Input
Sensing

Sourcing Input

5–24

Input

1000

–

Common

Sourcing Output

Common

–

Output
Switch

CPU
Input
Sensing

CPU

Common
+

Output
Switch

Output

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Load

–

Chapter 5: Installation and Wiring

I/O “Common Terminal” Concepts
In order for a CPU I/O circuit to operate, current must enter at one terminal and exit at
another. This means at least two terminals are associated with every I/O point. In the figure
below, the input or output terminal is the main path for the current. One additional terminal
must provide the return path to the power supply.
If there was unlimited module space then every I/O point could have two dedicated terminals
as the figure above shows. Providing this level of flexibility is not practical or necessary for
most applications. Most I/O point groups share the return path (common) among two or
more I/O points. The figure below shows a group (or bank) of four input points which share a
common return path. In this way, the four inputs require only five terminals instead of eight.
CPU
Field
Device

Main Path
(I/O point)

I/O
Circuit

–
Return Path

CPU
Input Sensing
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
+
–

Common

Electrical Common
To All Input Points

NOTE: In the circuit above, the current in the common path is equal to the sum of the energized channels.
This is especially important in output circuits, where larger gauge wire is sometimes needed for the
commons.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

5–25

A
2
3
4
5
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Chapter 5: Installation and Wiring

DC Input Wiring Methods

A
2
3
4
5
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

I/O modules with DC inputs can be wired as either sinking or
sourcing inputs. The dual diodes (shown in this diagram) allow
current to flow in either direction. Inputs grouped by a common
point must be either all sinking or all sourcing. DC inputs typically
operate in the range of +12–24 VDC.

CPU DC Input

Input

Common

Sinking Input Sensor (NPN Type) to CPU Sourcing Input
In the following example, a field device has an open-collector NPN transistor output. When
energized, it sinks current to ground from the DC input point. The CPU input current is
sourced from the common terminal connected to power supply (+).
Field Device

Input
(sourcing)

Output
(sinking)

DC NPN Sensor
(Sinking)

CPU DC Input

CPU Input
(Sourcing)

Supply
Ground

–

Common

Sourcing Input Sensor (PNP Type) to CPU Sinking Input
In the following example, a field device has an open-emitter PNP transistor output. When
energized, it sources current to the CPU input point, which sinks the current to ground. Since
the field device loop is sourcing current, no additional power supply is required for the module.
Field Device

DC PNP Sensor
(Sourcing)

Input
(sinking)

CPU Input
(Sinking)

Output (sourcing)
Ground

Common

DC Output Wiring Methods
I/O modules with DC output circuits are wired as all current sinking only or current sourcing
only depending on which output module part number is used. DC outputs typically operate
in the range of +5–24 VDC.
CPU Sinking Output to Sourcing Load Device
Many applications require connecting a CPU output point to a DC input on a field device load.
This type of connection is made to carry a low-level DC signals.
In the following example, the CPU output point sinks current to ground (common) when
energized. The output is connected to a field device load with a sourcing input.
CPU DC Output
+DC Power

Field Device
Power
Output
(sinking)

CPU Output
(Sinking)

Common

5–26

1000

+
–

Input
(sourcing)
20-28 VDC
Ground

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

DC Load
(Sourcing)

Chapter 5: Installation and Wiring
CPU DC Sinking Output to Sinking Load Device
In the example below, a sinking output point is connected to the sinking input of a field device
load. In this case, both the CPU output and field device input are sinking type. Since the
circuit must have one sourcing and one sinking device, we add sourcing capability to the CPU
output by using a pull-up resistor. In the circuit below, we connect R pull-up from the output
to the DC output circuit power input.
CPU DC Output

CPU Output
(Sinking with
Pull-up Resistor)

DC NPN Load
(Sinking)

Power

+DC pwr

Field Device

pull-up
(sourcing)

(sinking)

Output
Supply
Common

Input
(sinking)

–

Ground

R input

NOTE: DO NOT attempt to drive a heavy load (>25mA) with this pull-up method.
NOTE: Using the pull-up resistor to implement a sourcing output has the effect of inverting the output point
logic. In other words, the field device input is energized when the CPU output is OFF, from a ladder logic
point-of-view. Your ladder program must comprehend this and generate an inverted output. Or, you may
choose to cancel the effect of the inversion elsewhere, such as in the field device.

It is important to choose the correct value of Rpull-up. In order to do so, we need to know the
nominal input current to the field device (Iinput) when the input is energized. If this value
is not known, it can be calculated as shown (a typical value is 15mA). Then use Iinput and
the voltage of the external supply to compute Rpull-up. Then calculate the power Ppull-up (in
watts), in order to size Rpull-up properly.

input

R input

R pull-up =

pull-up

1000

input (turn–on)

V supply – 0.7
I

input

V supply

– R input

R pull-up

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

5–27

A
2
3
4
5
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Chapter 5: Installation and Wiring

Relay Outputs - Wiring Methods
Relay outputs are available for the Productivity1000. Relays are best for the following
applications:

A
2
3
4
5
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

• Loads that require higher currents than the solid-state outputs can deliver
• Cost-sensitive applications
• Some output channels need isolation from other outputs (such as when some loads require
different voltages than other loads)

Some applications in which NOT to use relays:
• Loads that require currents under 10mA
• Loads which must be switched at high speed or heavy duty cycle.
Relay with Form A contacts

Relay outputs are available in two contact arrangements.
Form A type, or SPST (single pole, single throw) type. They
are normally open and are the simplest to use. The Form
C, or SPDT (single pole, double throw) type has a center
contact which moves and a stationary contact on either side.
This provides a normally closed contact and a normally open
contact.
Relay with Form C contacts

The relays in some relay output modules share common
terminals, which connect to the wiper contact in each relay
of the bank. Other relay modules have relays which are
completely isolated from each other. In all cases, the module
drives the relay coil when the corresponding output point is
on.

5–28

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 5: Installation and Wiring

Relay Outputs – Transient Suppression for Inductive Loads in a Control System
The following pages are intended to give a quick overview of the negative effects of transient
voltages on a control system and provide some simple advice on how to effectively minimize
them. The need for transient suppression is often not apparent to the newcomers in the
automation world. Many mysterious errors that can afflict an installation can be traced back
to a lack of transient suppression.
What is a Transient Voltage and Why is it Bad?
Inductive loads (devices with a coil) generate transient voltages as they transition from being
energized to being de-energized. If not suppressed, the transient can be many times greater
than the voltage applied to the coil. These transient voltages can damage CPU outputs or other
electronic devices connected to the circuit, and cause unreliable operation of other electronics
in the general area. Transients must be managed with suppressors for long component life and
reliable operation of the control system.
This example shows a simple circuit with a small 24V/125mA/3W relay. As you can see, when
the switch is opened, thereby de-energizing the coil, the transient voltage generated across the
switch contacts peaks at 140V.
Example: Circuit with no Suppression
Volts

Oscilloscope

160
140
120

24 VDC

100

+
-

Relay Coil
(24V/125mA/3W,
AutomationDirect part no.
750R-2C-24D)

60
40
20
0
-20

In the same circuit, replacing the relay with a larger 24V/290mA/7W relay will generate a
transient voltage exceeding 800V (not shown). Transient voltages like this can cause many
problems, including:
• Relay contacts driving the coil may experience arcing, which can pit the contacts and reduce the
relay’s lifespan.
• Solid state (transistor) outputs driving the coil can be damaged if the transient voltage exceeds the
transistor’s ratings. In extreme cases, complete failure of the output can occur the very first time a
coil is de-energized.
• Input circuits, which might be connected to monitor the coil or the output driver, can also be
damaged by the transient voltage.

A very destructive side-effect of the arcing across relay contacts is the electromagnetic
interference (EMI) it can cause. This occurs because the arcing causes a current surge, which
releases RF energy. The entire length of wire between the relay contacts, the coil, and the
power source carries the current surge and becomes an antenna that radiates the RF energy. It
will readily couple into parallel wiring and may disrupt the CPU and other electronics in the
area. This EMI can make an otherwise stable control system behave unpredictably at times.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

5–29

A
2
3
4
5
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Chapter 5: Installation and Wiring

A
2
3
4
5
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

CPU’s Integrated Transient Suppressors
Although the CPU outputs typically have integrated suppressors to protect against transients,
they are not capable of handling them all. It is usually necessary to have some additional
transient suppression for an inductive load.
Here is another example using the same 24V/125mA/3W relay used earlier. This example
measures the PNP transistor output of a typical CPU, which incorporates an integrated Zener
diode for transient suppression. Instead of the 140V peak in the first example, the transient
voltage here is limited to about 40V by the Zener diode. While the CPU will probably tolerate
repeated transients in this range for some time, the 40V is still beyond the module’s peak
output voltage rating of 30V.
Example: Small Inductive Load with Only Integrated Suppression
2VFLOORVFRSH

9ROWV
)RUWKLVH[DPSOHD9P$:
UHOD\LVXVHG $XWRPDWLRQ'LUHFW
SDUWQR5&'

9'&

5HOD\
&RLO

The next example uses the same circuit as above, but with a larger 24V/290mA/7W relay,
thereby creating a larger inductive load. As you can see, the transient voltage generated is much
worse, peaking at over 50V. Driving an inductive load of this size without additional transient
suppression is very likely to permanently damage the CPU output.
Example: Larger Inductive Load with Only Integrated Suppression
2VFLOORVFRSH

9ROWV
)RUWKLVH[DPSOHDP$:
UHOD\LVXVHG $XWRPDWLRQ'LUHFW
SDUWQR6&(*9'&

9'&

5HOD\
&RLO

Additional transient suppression should be used in both of these examples. If you are unable
to measure the transients generated by the connected loads of your control system, using
additional transient suppression on all inductive loads would be the safest practice.

5–30

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 5: Installation and Wiring
Types of Additional Transient Protection
DC Coils:
The most effective protection against transients from a DC coil is a flyback diode. A flyback
diode can reduce the transient to roughly 1V over the supply voltage, as shown in this example.
DC Flyback Circuit

Volts
30

Oscilloscope

24 VDC

+
_

15
10
5
0
-5

Sinking

Sourcing

Many AutomationDirect socketed relays and motor starters have add-on flyback diodes
that plug or screw into the base, such as the AD-ASMD-250 protection diode module and
784-4C-SKT-1 socket module shown below. If an add-on flyback diode is not available for
your inductive load, an easy way to add one is to use AutomationDirect’s DN-D10DR-A
diode terminal block, a 600VDC power diode mounted in a slim DIN rail housing.

AD-ASMD-250
Protection Diode Module

784-4C-SKT-1
Relay Socket

1000

DN-D10DR-A
Diode Terminal Block

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

5–31

A
2
3
4
5
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Chapter 5: Installation and Wiring
Two more common options for DC coils are Metal Oxide Varistors (MOV) or TVS diodes.
These devices should be connected across the driver (CPU output) for best protection as shown
below. The optimum voltage rating for the suppressor is the lowest rated voltage available that
will NOT conduct at the supply voltage, while allowing a safe margin.
AutomationDirect’s ZL-TSD8-24 transorb module is a good choice for 24VDC circuits. It
has a bank of 8 uni-directional 30V TVS diodes. Since they are uni-directional, be sure to
observe the polarity during installation. MOVs or bi-directional TVS diodes would install at
the same location, but have no polarity concerns.

A
2
3
4
5
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

DC MOV or TVS Diode Circuit

24 VDC _

ZL-TSD8-24
Transorb Module

Sinking

Sourcing

AC Coils:
Two options for AC coils are MOVs or bi-directional TVS diodes. These devices are most
effective at protecting the driver from a transient voltage when connected across the driver
(CPU output) but are also commonly connected across the coil. The optimum voltage rating
for the suppressor is the lowest rated voltage available that will NOT conduct at the supply
voltage, while allowing a safe margin.
AutomationDirect’s ZL-TSD8-120 transorb module is a good choice for 120VAC circuits. It
is a bank of eight bi-directional 180V TVS diodes.
AC MOV or Bi-Directional Diode Circuit

VAC

ZL-TSD8-120
Transorb Module

NOTE: Manufacturers of devices with coils frequently offer MOV or TVS diode suppressors as an addon option which mount conveniently across the coil. Before using them, carefully check the suppressor
ratings. Just because the suppressor is made specifically for that part does not mean it will reduce the
transient voltages to an acceptable level.

For example, a MOV or TVS diode rated for use on 24-48 VDC coils would need to have a
high enough voltage rating to NOT conduct at 48V. That suppressor might typically start
conducting at roughly 60VDC. If it were mounted across a 24V coil, transients of roughly
84V (if sinking output) or -60V (if sourcing output) could reach the CPU output. Many
semiconductor CPU outputs cannot tolerate such levels.

5–32

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Communications

Chapter

In This Chapter...
Communications......................................................................................................... 6-1
Communication Ports................................................................................................ 6-1
Communications: Connectivity.................................................................................. 6-7
P1-540 Port Connections.......................................................................................... 6-7
ASCII and Custom Protocol Functionality................................................................ 6-12
ASCII Instructions.................................................................................................... 6-12
Custom Protocol Instructions.................................................................................. 6-13
Communications: Ethernet....................................................................................... 6-15
TCP and UDP Port Numbers................................................................................... 6-15
IP Addressing and Subnetting................................................................................. 6-15
PC Setup................................................................................................................. 6-16
CPU Setup............................................................................................................... 6-17
TCP Connection Behavior with Modbus TCP and Network Instructions.................. 6-18
Communications Modbus Functionality.................................................................. 6-19
Master/Client Function Code and Data Type Support............................................. 6-19
Slave/Server Function Code and Data Type Support............................................... 6-21
Assigning Modbus Addresses to Tags...................................................................... 6-22
Modbus Options..................................................................................................... 6-25
Modbus Instructions................................................................................................ 6-28
Network Instructions............................................................................................... 6-30
Automatic Poll versus Manual Polling and Interlocking............................................ 6-31
Message Queue....................................................................................................... 6-33
EtherNet/IP for the Productivity Series................................................................... 6-34
Terminology Definitions.......................................................................................... 6-34
Network Layer Chart............................................................................................... 6-35
EtherNet/IP Data..................................................................................................... 6-35

Table of Contents
Class 1 and Class 3 Connections............................................................................. 6-36
Setup Example: Productivity1000 as EtherNet/IP Adapter....................................... 6-36
Setup Example: Productivity1000 as EtherNet/IP Scanner....................................... 6-39
Troubleshooting Tips............................................................................................... 6-42
ProNET ................................................................................................................... 6-45
Custom Protocol Over Ethernet............................................................................... 6-47
Communications: Port Configuration...................................................................... 6-49
Ethernet Configuration............................................................................................ 6-49
Local Ethernet Port Settings.................................................................................... 6-51
Remote Access Configuration.................................................................................. 6-51
Serial Configuration................................................................................................. 6-52
RS-232 and RS-485 Port Settings............................................................................. 6-52
Communications: Error Codes................................................................................. 6-55
Productivity1000 Communication Error Codes........................................................ 6-55
P1000 EtherNet/IP Error Codes............................................................................... 6-56

1000

Hardware
User Manual,
1st Edition
Hardware
User Manual,
1st Edition

Chapter 6: Communications

Communications
Communication Ports

The AutomationDirect Productivity1000 CPU is provided with several
Communications Ports. A detailed description of each of these ports follows in the
sections below.
4

P1-540

RUN

PWR

RUN

USB

PGM

LINK

Item #

CPU

µSD

Communication Port

microSD Slot

MicroUSB 2.0 Programming Port

RS232 Serial Port (RJ12)

RS485 Serial Port (TB Style)

10/100 MB Ethernet Port

Communication Ports:
ACT LINK
ACT
LINK
10/100

RS-485
RS-232

RTS TX RX

ETHERNET

REMOTE I/O

T
+

STOP

General Specifications

P1-540

3
5

1. m
icroSD Card: The microSD card slot is provided for data logging
capability. Files stored on the microSD card by a P1-540 or the
Productivity Suite programming software are stored under a default
name, so only one project may be handled at a time on a microSD
card. Existing projects on the microSD card will be overwritten
without a prompt.

Data Logging: The Data Logger tool allows setup of periodic or
event-based data logging of tag and System Errors to the microSD
card. Data Logger setup is accessed under the Monitor & Debug
Menu. See Communications Connectivity section for more
information.
2.
MicroUSB : The microUSB 2.0 port uses a Type B connector.
It is used for connection to a PC running the Productivity Suite
programming software and Online monitoring of program.

NOTE: The microUSB port is NOT compatible with older 1.0/1.1 full speed USB devices.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

6-1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 6: Communications

P1-540 Communication Ports, cont’d
3.
RS-232: The RS-232 port is an RJ-12 connector located on the lower right front of the CPU.
This port can be used for:
•
Modbus RTU Master connections.
• Modbus RTU Slave connections.
• ASCII Incoming and Outgoing communications.
• Custom Protocol Incoming and Outgoing communications.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Modbus RTU Master connections: The RS-232 port is intended to be used for point-to-point
connections but it is possible to connect up to 128 devices on a network if an RS-232 to RS-485/422
converter is connected to the port (such as a FA-ISOCON). This is accomplished by using the
communications instructions in the ladder project (MRX, MWX, RX, WX). If 4-wire RS-485 or
RS-422 communications is needed, using this port with an FA-ISOCON is the best method. See
Communications Connectivity section in this manual for more information.
Modbus RTU
Master
FA-ISOCON
may be directly
powered by P1-540
RS-232 port.

Modbus RTU
Slave Device 1

ZIPLink Comm
Port Adapter
Required
Part No.
ZL-CMA15L

Modbus RTU
Slave Device 2

ZIPLink Comm
Port Adapter
Required
Part No.
ZL-CMA15

Modbus RTU
Slave Device 128

Modbus RTU Slave connections: The RS-232 port is intended to be used for point-to-point
connections but it is possible for the RS-232 port to be used on a Modbus RTU network by using
a RS-232 to RS-485/422 converter. The port is addressable in the Hardware Configuration in the
Productivity Suite programming software. It is important to note that the RS-232 port cannot be
a Modbus RTU master and slave concurrently. If the port is set to Modbus RTU and there are no
communications instructions (MRX, MWX, RX, WX) in the project, the CPU will automatically
respond to Modbus requests from a Modbus master. See Communications Connectivity section for
more information.

6-2

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 6: Communications

P1-540 Communication Ports, cont’d
ASCII Incoming and Outgoing communications: The RS-232 port can be used for sending and
receiving non-sequenced String data. This feature is typically used for receiving bar code strings from
a scanner or sending statistical data to a terminal or serial printer using the ASCII IN and ASCII OUT
instructions. See Communications Connectivity section for more information

RS-232 ASCII In Communication

2-wire
RS-232





RS-232 ASCII Out Communication

Using AIN
Instruction

2-wire
RS-232

Using AOUT
Instruction

Custom Protocol Incoming and Outgoing communications: The RS-232 port can be used for
sending and receiving non-sequenced byte arrays to various devices. This function is typically used
for communicating with devices that don’t support the Modbus protocol but have another serial
communications protocol. This is accomplished by using the Custom Protocol In and Custom
Protocol Out instructions. The RS-232 port is intended to be used for point-to-point connections but
it is possible for the RS-232 port to be used on a multi-node network by using a RS-232 to RS-485/422
converter. See Communications Connectivity section for more information.

RS-232 Custom Protocol In and Out

Custom
Protocol
Device

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

6-3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 6: Communications

P1-540 Communication Ports, cont’d
4.
The Modbus RTU Slave Connections: The RS-485 network port is used for multi-node
networks. The port is addressable in the Hardware Configuration in the Productivity Suite
programming software. If the port is set to Modbus RTU and there are no communications
instructions (MRX, MWX, RX, WX) in the project, the CPU will automatically respond to
Modbus requests from a Modbus master. See Communications Connectivity section for more
information.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

RS-485 Modbus RTU Slave Network Topology
Modbus RTU
Master
FA-ISOCON
may be directly
powered by P1-540
RS-232 port.

Modbus RTU
Slave Device 1

ZIPLink Comm
Port Adapter
Required
Part No.
ZL-CMA15L

Modbus RTU
Slave Device 2

ZIPLink Comm
Port Adapter
Required
Part No.
ZL-CMA15

Modbus RTU
Slave Device 128

NOTE: See respective PLC Manual for communication port cable pinouts.

ASCII Incoming and Outgoing Communications: The RS-485 port can be used for sending
and receiving non-sequenced String data. If long distances are required between the ASCII
device and the CPU, the RS-485 port is the better selection because of its increased distance
support (1,000 meters). ASCII communications are typically used for receiving bar code strings
from a scanner or sending statistical data to a terminal or serial printer using the ASCII IN and
ASCII OUT instructions. See Communications Connectivity section for more information.

RS-232 ASCII In Communication

2-wire
RS-232




RS-232 ASCII Out Communication

Using AIN
Instruction

2-wire
RS-232

Using AOUT
Instruction

6-4

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 6: Communications

P1-540 Communication Ports, cont’d
5.
Ethernet: The Ethernet port is 10/100Base-T Ethernet with an RJ-45 style connector. It is used for:
• Connection to a PC running the Productivity Suite programming software.
• Modbus TCP Client connections (Modbus requests sent from the CPU).
• Modbus TCP Server connections (Modbus requests received by the CPU).
• Custom Protocol over Ethernet
• ProNET
• EtherNet/IP Scanner (32 Adapters)
• EtherNet/IP Adapter (4 scanners) with 8 connections per device.
• Outgoing Email.
odbus TCP Client Connections: The CPU can connect to 16 Modbus TCP server devices
M
concurrently by means of communications instructions in the ladder program (MRX, MWX, RX,
WX). It is possible to connect to more than 16 Modbus TCP server devices, but not concurrently.

Modbus TCP Client (RX-WX)
P1-540

Stride
Ethernet
Switch

UP to Modbus TCP
Client Device 32

C-More Device 1

Modbus TCP
Client Device 2

This is accomplished by having communications instructions for more than 16 devices in the ladder
program and controlling the enabling and disabling of the instructions so that only 16 devices are
enabled at a given time. To connect to non Productivity1000 devices, use the MRX (Modbus Read)
and MWX (Modbus Write) instructions.
The greatest difference in the RX versus the MRX is that with the RX, the Tag Name in the target CPU
can be referenced directly and does not need a corresponding Modbus address. This is accomplished
by mapping local and remote tagnames together within the local CPU’s RX instruction. Once the
instruction is set up to read a remote project, the “Tags of Remote Project” or “Array Tags of Remote
Project” drop down lists will be accessible. Map the Tag of the Remote project to a Tag in the Local
project to read this data.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

6-5

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 6: Communications

P1-540 Communication Ports, cont’d

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

odbus TCP Server Connections: The CPU can serve data back to 16 Modbus TCP Client devices
M
concurrently. If 16 Modbus TCP Client devices are connected to the CPU, then any new TCP
connection requests will be denied until one of the existing 16 devices drops its connection. If the
Client device connecting to the CPU is not a Productivity1000 device, then a Modbus address must
be assigned to the tag that is being requested. This is done in the Tag Database window. If the device
connecting to the CPU is another P1000 CPU or C-more panel, no Modbus address is required.
Custom Protocol Incoming and Outgoing Communications: The Ethernet port can be used for
sending and receiving non-sequenced byte arrays to various devices. This function is typically used for
communicating with devices that don’t support the Modbus protocol but have another custom Ethernet
communications protocol. This is accomplished by configuring a "Custom Protocol Ethernet Device"
using the hardware configuration and then using the "Custom Protocol Ethernet (CPE)" instruction.
See Communications Connectivity section for more information.

6-6

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 6: Communications

Communications: Connectivity
P1-540 Port Connections
The AutomationDirect Procuctivity1000 P1-540 CPU is
provided with several communications ports. The Connectivity
for each of these ports is described in the following sections. The
Communication Ports available are:

4
P1-540

RUN

PWR

RUN

USB

PGM

LINK

1. microSD Card Slot

CPU

For program data logging (microSD card not included with
processor).

2. MicroUSB Port

LINK
10/100

ACT

ACT LINK

µSD

RS-485
RS-232

RTS TX RX

ETHERNET

REMOTE I/O

T
+

STOP

3
5

Programming port with a USB 2.0 Type Micro B female
connector. This port requires a MicroUSB Type A-Micro B cable
(such as the USB-CBL-AMICB6 cable).
The Micro USB Port is the simplest method of connecting the
Productivity Suite Programming Software to the P1-540 CPU.
After the programming software has been installed, connect a USB
A-Micro- B cable to the CPU and select the “Choose CPU” option.
The dialog shown below will appear.
Highlight the CPU listed in the dialog box and click on “Connect”.
No configuration is required.
NOTE: The MicroUSB port is NOT compatible with older 1.0/1.1 full speed
USB devices.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

6-7

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 6: Communications

3. RS-232 Port:
Serial RS-232 multipurpose communications port with RJ12 connector.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

The RS-232 Port can be connected to Modbus RTU master or slave devices, as well as devices that
output non-sequenced ASCII strings or characters. The manner in which these devices are wired to
the CPU depends whether the device is considered to be Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) or Data
Communications Equipment (DCE).
If two DTE devices are connected together, the RX and TX signals should cross or the RX of one device
should go to the TX of the other device and the TX of one device should go to the RX of the other device
(as shown below).
Pin #

6
1
6-pin RJ12 Female
Modular Connector

1 0V
3 RXD
4 TXD

Signal

GND

Logic Ground

RTS

RS-232 Output

TXD

RS-232 Output

RXD

RS-232 Input

+5V

210mA Maximum

GND

Logic Ground

0V 1
RXD 3
TXD 4

The CPU is considered a DTE device. Most Modbus or ASCII devices being connected to the
CPU will also be considered a DTE device and will need to swap TX and RX, but you should always
consult the documentation of that device to verify. If a communication device, such as a Modem, is
placed between the CPU and another Modbus or ASCII device it will most likely require connecting
the signals straight across (TX to TX and RX to RX). Again, this can differ from manufacturer to
manufacturer so always consult the documentation before wiring the devices together.
The RTS signal on pin 5 of the RS-232 Port will turn on when the TX signal is turned on and the
RTS signal will turn off when the TX signal turns off. The amount of time that the RTS signal turns
on before the TX signal turns on and the amount of time that the RTS signal waits before turning off
after the TX signal turns off is adjustable in the P1-540 CPU Module Configuration for the RS-232
Port. The RTS signal is very often required for media converters, such as a RS-232 to RS-422/485
converter (much like the FA-ISOCON).
The RTS signal is sometimes required for use with radio modems as well (Key on and off control).
There is also +5VDC @ 210mA on pin 2 available for powering an external device such as the
C-more Micro panel.

6-8

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 6: Communications

4. RS-485 Port
The RS-485 multipurpose serial communications port requires a removable 3-pin connector (See
below). This port is useful for connecting multiple Modbus and ASCII devices on one network and/or
connecting devices to the CPU at distances greater than 50 feet (RS-232 limit). The RS-485 standard
supports distances of up to 1000 meters without requiring a repeater. The RS-485 Port on the CPU
can support up to 50 devices, depending on load of each device (this assumes a 19K Ohm load for each
device). This number can be increased by placing an RS-485 repeater on the network, if necessary.
This port only supports RS-485 2-wire connections. For 4-wire RS-485 or RS-422, a converter, such
as an FA-ISOCON, should be used with the RS-232 Port.
NOTE: A 120 Ohm resistor is required at each end of the network for termination.

NOTE: ZIPLink Comm Port Adapter Part No. ZL-CMA15 or ZL-CMA15L may be used to make the connection
at DL06 or DL205 CPU Port 2.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

6-9

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 6: Communications

5. Ethernet Port

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

The 10/100 Base-T Ethernet port with RJ45 connector is used for programming and Modbus TCP
Client/Server functions.
Crossover Cable
10Base-T/100Base-TX
1
8

TD+ 1
TD– 2
RD+ 3
4
5
RD– 6
7
8

GRN/WHT

OR/WHT

GRN

OR/WHT

GRN/WHT

BLU

BLU/WHT

GRN

BRN/WHT

BRN

RJ45

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

TD+
TD–
RD+
RD–

RJ45

General Information
Crossover cables can be used to directly connect two endpoint Ethernet devices such as a PC
network interface card and the CPU. Crossover or patch (or Straight-through) cables can be
used to directly connect endpoint Ethernet devices and the CPU.
The maximum distance for one cable or segment is 100 meters (328 feet). If the distance
required between 2 devices is greater than 100 meters, add an Ethernet switch to extend the
distance. An Ethernet switch can be added every 100 meters (or less) almost indefinitely. Each
Ethernet switch added will incur some latency (actual amount differs between switches and
manufacturers). So if a very long distance is needed between 2 Ethernet devices, it may be
better to convert to fiber optics.
The External Ethernet Port can be used as a programming port, a Modbus TCP Client (16
Servers) and Server (16 Clients), EtherNet/IP Scanner (32) and Adapter (4 ), Custom Protocol
over Ethernet, ProNET.
The External Ethernet Port can also be used to send emails using the EMAIL instruction.
Create a Connection
To communicate with the Productivity Suite programming software, connect an Ethernet cable
from the PC to the CPU External Ethernet Port. Once the software has been opened, click on
CPU and select the “Choose CPU” option. The dialog shown below will appear.

6-10

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 6: Communications

5. Ethernet Port, cont’d
Highlight the CPU that you wish to connect to and press the “Connect” button. You may see in the
CPU Connections dialog box CPU’s that are not on the same subnet as your PC, but this does not
mean you can connect to them. To connect to the CPU, you must configure either your PC or your
CPU to be in the same subnet. You can easily change the Ethernet settings of the CPU by highlighting
it and selecting the “Change CPU IP/Name” button (shown below). Or if you prefer, the PC Setup
section of this chapter contains information on configuring the Ethernet settings of your PC.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

6-11

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 6: Communications

ASCII and Custom Protocol Functionality

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Besides Modbus RTU, there are two additional functions supported on the serial ports in the
Productivity1000 system.
• The first function is the ability to send and receive text-based data with devices such as bar code
readers and serial printers.
• The second function is the ability to communicate serially with other devices that do not support
the Modbus protocol and lack a Productivity1000 driver.

ASCII Instructions
he ASCII In/Out instructions use the String data type to send or receive text-based data
T
through the serial port. The String data type is only intended for use with the “printable
character set”. This can include numbers, letters or special characters.
With the ASCII In instruction, the CPU can receive a fixed length of characters or a variable length of
characters with a termination code (an ‘end of message’ character).

The ASCII Out instruction sends text-based data out of
the serial port to various devices for control, printing
or display.

6-12

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 6: Communications

ASCII and Custom Protocol Functionality, cont’d
While the ASCII In instruction and the ASCII Out instruction can both be used in a project,
they are not intended to be used in conjunction with one another. In other words, it is not
advisable to use the ASCII Out instruction to send a String to a device that will respond (if the
response is needed) and to use the ASCII In instruction to try to receive this data.
The ASCII instruction limitations are:
1.

AIN and AOUT cannot be enabled at the same time on the same serial port.

When the AOUT completes, the AIN cannot be enabled until the next logic scan.

3. AIN does not buffer data received while the AIN is not active. If a device responds too quickly,
some of the response may be lost before the AIN instruction can start receiving data.

Custom Protocol Instructions
The Custom Protocol is a HEX based protocol used to communicate with devices that do
not have the standard Modbus RTU Protocol. There are two instructions used with Custom
Protocol communication:
•

Custom Protocol Out (CPO)

•

Custom Protocol In (CPI)

Custom Protocol Out
The Custom Protocol Out
instruction allows the user to send
a ‘byte formatted’ packet of data
out of the CPU serial port.
Constant values and/or Tag values
can be used as the source for data
transmitted. There are several
formatting options including Byte
Swap and Checksum.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

6-13

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 6: Communications

ASCII and Custom Protocol Functionality, cont’d

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

The Checksum option allows the user to select where in the packet the checksum should be
inserted, what type of Checksum (CRC-8 bit, CRC-16 bit, CRC-32 bit, XOR-8 bit, XOR-16
bit and XOR 32 bit), which bytes of the data source should be used in the calculation of the
checksum, what the byte order should be of the checksum (if greater than 8 bit) and how to
preload the checksum calculation.
If the device requires a different Checksum calculation, this can be done outside of the
instruction in other ladder code and the resulting Tag values can be inserted where appropriate
in the packet.
Termination characters can also be specified when needed.
The Custom Protocol Out instruction is for transmission only. If information needs to be
received from field devices, the Custom Protocol In instruction will have to be used. Unlike
ASCII, the Custom Protocol will buffer the received data. When the Custom Protocol In
instruction is executed, it will retrieve any data held in this buffer. Therefore, the lost responses
found with ASCII communication do not occur with Custom Protocol communication.
Custom Protocol In
The Custom Protocol In instruction
has similar formatting options to the
Custom Protocol Out instruction.
The Custom Protocol In instruction
will calculate the Checksum of the
data packet received based on the
criteria specified in the instruction
and this will determine the state of the
status bits assigned to the instruction.
If the Checksum calculation passes
based on the criteria specified in the
instruction, the “Success” status bit
will become true. If the Checksum
calculation fails, the “Checksum
Error” status bit will become true.
With the CPI instruction, the packet
termination must be specified, either
in terms of a termination character(s)
or a packet length. If a Checksum
is expected in the reply, be sure to
include this in the Fixed Length
value specified.

6-14

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 6: Communications

Communications: Ethernet
TCP and UDP Port Numbers

When doing TCP/IP and UDP/IP communications, there is a Source Port number
and Destination Port number for every message. The Client device must be aware of the
Destination Port Number(s) the Server device is expecting to see and the Server device must
listen for this Destination Port number. After the Server device has received the message
with the Destination Port Number it is listening on, it will formulate the return message
(if the applications require this) with the Source Port Number from the message sent as its
Destination Port Number.
It is important to understand a little about the Port numbering concept because many Ethernet
devices, such as routers with firewalls, will block messages with Destination Port numbers that
are not configured for that device. Listed below are the default Port Numbers used in the
Productivity1000 system. Some of these are configurable, allowing more flexibility when going
through routers in many applications.
Port Number
(Decimal Format) TCP or UDP Configurable

Port

8888
9999

UDP
UDP

No
No

502

TCP

Yes

502
28784
502
8887
8887
25
44818
2222
18888

TCP
UDP
TCP
UDP
UDP
TCP
TCP
UDP
UDP

Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No*
Yes

Programming Software CPU Discovery
Programming Software Connection and Project Transfer
Modbus Client Connections
(MRX, MWX, RX and WX instructions)
Modbus Server Connections
GS-Drive Discovery
GS-Drive Connection
Remote I/O Discovery
Remote I/O Connection
Email Instruction
EtherNet/IP
EtherNet/IP
ProNET

* Adapters may choose to respond using another port number.

IP Addressing and Subnetting
IP Addresses (used in conjunction with the Subnet Mask and Default Gateway address) are
used for network routing. This allows for easy and logical separation of networks.
It is outside of the scope of this user manual to explain how IP Addresses and Subnet masks are
configured for actual usage. There are many books, documents and tools (Subnet calculators)
on the internet that provide this information. Each facility and network will incorporate their
own rules and guidelines for how their networks are to be configured.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

6-15

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 6: Communications

PC Setup
For testing and verification purpose, it is
recommended that the PC and the CPU be
on an isolated Ethernet switch. Configure the
PC’s network interface card setting as described
below.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

1. Go to Start, then Run, type ncpa.cpl in the
Open field and click on OK to bring up the
Network Connections dialog.

NOTE: Many system settings on your computer require Administrative privileges. Consult with your IT
department for necessary privileges and approvals.

NOTE: You should record initial settings prior to making any network configuration changes.

Network Connections
a. Right click on the
Network interface
shown in the Network
Connections dialog
and select Properties. If
there is more than one
Network Interface on the
PC, be sure to choose
the one connected to the
Ethernet Switch with the
CPU on it.
b. From the Local Area
Connection Properties
window, highlight the
Internet Protocol(TCP/
IP) selection and click on
Properties.

6-16

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 6: Communications

PC Setup, cont’d

Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties.
a.

In the Properties window, select Use the following IP address.

b. Enter an IP Address of 192.168.1.1 and Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 and select OK. Select
OK again on the Local Area Connection Properties window.

CPU Setup
Now configure the CPU’s network IP setting as shown below.
1. Select CPU from the Productivity Suite Software Main Menu and then select Choose CPU
from the drop down menu.
2.

The CPU Connections window will open as shown below.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

6-17

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 6: Communications

CPU Setup, cont’d

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Click to highlight the CPU connected to the Ethernet switch.

Select the “Change CPU IP/Name” button.

The Change IP Address/CPU Name window will open as shown below.

• E
nter an IP Address of 192.168.1.2 and Subnet Mask 255.255.0.0 for the CPU’s network IP
setting and select OK.

The CPU is now configured with the correct IP Address for connectivity with the PC. The IP
Address and Subnet Mask settings will very likely differ from what will be used in the actual
application. Consult the Network Administrator of the facility where the CPU will be installed
to get the appropriate settings for that network.

TCP Connection Behavior with Modbus TCP and Network Instructions
When performing communications over TCP, a Connection must be established before the
applications can transfer data. The connection is typically maintained until the application
decides that the connection is no longer needed and then the connection will be severed.
Frequent connects and disconnects are not efficient for the Client or the Server and can add
unnecessary network traffic. But maintaining connections needlessly is also costly to the Client
and Server in terms of processing and memory so this should also be avoided.
The CPU allows user control of Client connections through enabling and disabling the rungs
containing Modbus and Network instructions. The MRX, MWX, RX and WX instructions
have two options for sending messages: Automatic Poll and Manual Poll.
Automatic Poll sends out messages at a specified rate. When enabled, the instruction performs
a TCP connect with the Server device. Once the connection is established, the instruction
messages are sent at the rate entered in the poll rate field. This continues until the instruction
is disabled. The TCP connection will automatically be severed five seconds after the instruction
is disabled.
Manual Poll sends out a message each time the instruction is enabled. Enabling the instruction
performs a TCP connect with the Server device and sends the message one time. The TCP
connection will automatically be severed five seconds after receiving the reply from the Server
device. If the instruction gets another positive edge enable within the five seconds, the message
will be sent and the disconnect of the TCP connection will be delayed by an additional five
seconds.

6-18

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 6: Communications

Communications Modbus Functionality
Master/Client Function Code and Data Type Support
The following table lists the Modbus data type, the function code and the CPU source data
type that is supported when the CPU is the Client or Master on a Modbus TCP or serial
connection.
Modbus Client/Master Support (Using MRX and MWX Instructions)
Function
Function Name
Code

Modbus 984 Addressing
(Zero Based)

Modbus 984
Addressing

000000 - 065535

000001 - 065536

Productivity1000 Tag Types
(Data designation or source)
Discrete Output (DO)

Read Coil Status

Boolean (C )
Boolean System (SBRW)
Discrete Input (DI)

Read Coil Status

100000 - 165535

100001 - 165536

Boolean (C )
Boolean System (SBRW)
Integer 8 bit Unsigned (U8)
Integer 16 bit (S16)
Integer 16 bit Unsigned (U16)

Read Holding
Registers

400000 - 465535

400001 - 465536

Integer 16 bit BCD (B16)
Integer 32 bit (S32)
Integer 32 bit BCD (B32)
Integer 32 bit Float (F32)
Integer 16 bit System (SWRW)
Integer 8 bit Unsigned (U8)
Integer 16 bit (S16)
Integer 16 bit Unsigned (U16)

Read Input
Registers

300000 - 365535

300001 -365536

Integer 16 bit BCD (B16)
Integer 32 bit (S32)
Integer 32 bit BCD (B32)
Integer 32 bit Float (F32)
Integer 16 bit System (SWRW)
Discrete Input (DI)
Discrete Output (DO)

Write Single Coil

000000 - 065535

000001 - 065536

Boolean (C )
Boolean System (SBRW)
Boolean System Read Only (SBR)

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

6-19

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 6: Communications
Modbus Client/Master Support (Using MRX and MWX Instructions) (continued)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Modbus 984 Addressing
Function
Function Name
Code
(Zero Based)

Modbus 984
Addressing

Productivity1000 Tag Types
(Data designation or source)
Integer 8 bit Unsigned (U8)
Integer 16 bit (S16)
Integer 16 bit Unsigned (U16)

Write Single
Register

Integer 16 bit BCD (B16)

400000 - 465535

400001 - 465536

Integer 32 bit (S32)
Integer 32 bit BCD (B32)
Integer 32 bit Float (F32)
Integer 16 bit System (SWRW)
Integer 16 bit System Read Only (SWR)
Discrete Input (DI)

Write Multiple
Coils

000000 - 065535

000001 - 065536

Discrete Output (DO)
Boolean (C )
Boolean System (SBRW)
Boolean System Read Only (SBR)
Integer 8 bit Unsigned (U8)
Integer 16 bit (S16)
Integer 16 bit Unsigned (U16)

Write Multiple
Registers

Integer 16 bit BCD (B16)

400000 - 465535

400001 - 465536

Integer 32 bit (S32)
Integer 32 bit BCD (B32)
Integer 32 bit Float (F32)
Integer 16 bit System (SWRW)
Integer 16 bit System Read Only (SWR)

6-20

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 6: Communications

Slave/Server Function Code and Data Type Support
The following table lists the Modbus data type, the function code and the CPU source data type
that is supported when the CPU is the Server or Slave on a Modbus TCP or serial connection.
Modbus Server/Slave Support
Function Code

Function Name

Modbus 984 Addressing

Read Coil Status

000001 - 065536

Productivity1000 Tag Types
(Data designation or source)

Discrete Output (DO)
Boolean (C )
Boolean System (SBRW)

Read Coil Status

100001 - 165536

Discrete Input (DI)
Boolean System Read Only (SBR)
Integer 8 bit Unsigned (U8)
Integer 16 bit (S16)
Integer 16 bit Unsigned (U16)
Integer 16 bit BCD (B16)

Read Holding Registers

400001 - 465536

Integer 32 bit (S32)
Integer 32 bit BCD (B32)
Integer 32 bit Float (F32)
Integer 16 bit System (SWRW)
String
Analog Input, Integer 32 bit (AIS32)

Read Input Registers

300001 -365536

Analog Input, Float 32 bit (AIF32)
Integer 16 bit System Read Only (SWR)
Discrete Output (DO)

Write Single Coil

000001 - 065536

Boolean (C)
Boolean System (SBRW)
Integer 8 bit Unsigned (U8)
Integer 16 bit (S16)
Integer 16 bit Unsigned (U16)
Integer 16 bit BCD (B16)

Write Single Register

400001 - 465536

Integer 32 bit (S32)
Integer 32 bit BCD (B32)
Integer 32 bit Float (F32)
Integer 16 bit System (SWRW)
Integer 16 bit System Read Only (SBR)
String
Discrete Output (DO)

Write Multiple Coils

000001 - 065536

Boolean (C )
Boolean System (SBRW)

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

6-21

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 6: Communications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Modbus Server/Slave Support (continued)
Function Code

Function Name

Modbus 984 Addressing

Productivity1000 Tag Types
(Data designation or source)
Integer 8 bit Unsigned (U8)
Integer 16 bit (S16)
Integer 16 bit Unsigned (U16)
Integer 16 bit BCD (B16)

Write Multiple Registers

400001 - 465536

Integer 32 bit (S32)
Integer 32 bit BCD (B32)
Integer 32 bit Float (F32)
Integer 16 bit System (SWRW)
Integer 16 bit System Read Only (SBR)
String

Assigning Modbus Addresses to Tags
There are many different data types in the CPU. Because of this, the Modbus addresses need
to be mapped to the various tag data types in the CPU.
There are two ways to map Modbus addresses to Tags in the Programming software:
• Modbus mapping in Tag Database window.
• Modbus mapping when creating Tags.
1. Modbus mapping in Tag Database window:
• There are only two data sizes in the Modbus protocol: bits and words. In the CPU,
there are multiple size types, so it is sometimes necessary to map multiple Modbus
addresses to a single Tag entity. There are also array data structures in the CPU.
When Modbus addresses are mapped to arrays, they will be mapped as a contiguous
block of addresses. This is, in fact, the most efficient method to handle Modbus
communications.
• In the Tag Database window, there are two columns named “Mod Start” and “Mod
End”. To map a Modbus address to a tag in the Tag Database window, simply
double-click in the Mod Start field for the Tag.

6-22

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 6: Communications

Assigning Modbus Addresses, cont’d

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

• When this is done, two values will appear in the field
The left most value is the Modbus data type. This is
fixed based upon the tag data type. The chart below
indicates the four different Modbus data types in the
984 addressing scheme.

Address Identifier

Modbus 984 Address Type

0xxxxx

Coil (Read/Write bit)

1xxxxx

Input (Read Only bit)

3xxxxx

Input Register (Read Only 16 bit word)

4xxxxx

Holding Register (Read/Write 16 bit word)

The right most value in
the “Mod Start” field is the
address offset (range is from
1 – 65535). You can accept
the value that is pre-filled or
the value can be changed.
The software automatically
pre-fills the address offset with
the next available address.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

6-23

Chapter 6: Communications

Assigning Modbus Addresses, cont’d

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

2. Modbus mapping when creating Tags:
Modbus addresses can be assigned to Tags as they are created in the Tag Database.
Type in the Modbus offset value when entering the Tag Name and Data Type.

If the address is already assigned, a warning message will appear.

6-24

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 6: Communications

Modbus Options
The Modbus protocol does not have a specific method outlined for data types outside of bits
and 16-bit words. Most systems now have 32-bit data types. In order to transport 32-bit data
types across Modbus, they must be placed into two Modbus 16-bit registers. Unfortunately,
some devices do not support this method, so sometimes incompatibilities in the order in which
the 16-bit high word and low word are handled between devices persist.
In order to alleviate this situation, there are some options for handling this in the programming
software. To find the Modbus Address options, go to File and click on Project Properties and
then click on the “Modbus Server Settings” tab.

a. No exception response for non-existing Modbus address requests: Because the Modbus
addresses can be manually assigned to tags, it is possible that gaps can occur in the Modbus
address mapping. For example: Tag 1 has Modbus address 400001 assigned to it and Tag 2 has
Modbus address 400003 assigned to it.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

6-25

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 6: Communications

Most Modbus Master/Client devices will attempt to optimize their data requests to a Modbus
Slave/Server device by requesting blocks of data instead of individual registers. In the case
mentioned previously, most Modbus masters would send one read request starting at 400001
and a size of three instead of sending two read requests starting at 400001 with size one and
400003 with size one as shown below.

Display Object

400001

Display Object

400003

d
Rea
3

000

r 40

2 fo

est #

u
Req
000

000

r 40

1 fo

est #

01-4

000

est 4

More efficient to do 1 block
read of 400001 – 400003
than 2 reads of 400001 by
itself and 400003 by itself.

u
Req

d
Rea

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Modbus Options, cont’d

I n the example shown above on left, a Modbus Slave/Server device should give an exception
response since there is no Modbus Address of 400002 in the device. This method can cause a
lot of inefficiencies. By selecting the “No exception response for non-existing Modbus address
requests” option, the CPU will not give an exception response to the request. Note that if
Modbus address 400002 by itself were requested it would give an exception response.
b.

Word swap 32 bit tags: (S-32, AIS-32, AOS-32, F-32, FI-32, FO-32):

Word swap allows the word order of 32-bit tags to be changed when sending the values across
Modbus. The default selection is on, which returns the data low word first.

Tag 1 (Integer, 32-Bit) = 305,419,896 (hex = 0x12345678)
Low
Tag1 Modbus address = 400001, 400002

High
Word
First

6-26

High
Word
Last

Modbus reply for Tag 1 (Word Swap ON ) = 01 03 04 56 78 12 34

Word
First

Low
Word
Last

Modbus reply for Tag 1 (Word Swap OFF) = 01 03 04 12 34 56 78

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 6: Communications

Modbus Options, cont’d
c.

Map value to a single 16 bit Modbus register:

This option allows for compatibility with devices that do not support 32-bit Modbus
functionality. This option can be selected individually for the Analog Input and Output Signed
32 data types and the Internal Signed 32 data types, including the array form of these data types.
This function is only useful when the value contained in a 32-bit tag does not exceed a signed
15-bit value (32,765).
Tag 1 (Integer, 32-Bit) = 22136 (hex = 0x00005678)
With “Map value to a single 16 bit Modbus register” turned OFF =
Tag 1 Modbus address = 400001, 400002
Modbus reply for Tag1 (Word Swap ON) = 01 03 04 56 78 00 00
With “Map value to a single 16 bit Modbus register” turned ON =
Tag 1 Modbus address = 400001
Modbus reply for Tag1 = 01 03 02 56 78
d. Map value to two consecutive 16-bit Modbus registers:
Allows for 32-bit data types to be mapped to two consecutive 16-bit registers. This option is
selected as default.
All of the options in the “Modbus Address” tab of the Project Properties only apply to the
Modbus Slave/Server functionality. Similar options are available for the Modbus Master/Client
functions as well and are available in the MRX and MWX Modbus instructions.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

6-27

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 6: Communications

Modbus Instructions
To read or set data in other Modbus Slave/Server devices, there are two instructions available
in the programming software, Modbus Read and Modbus Write.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

he Modbus Read (MRX) instruction is used to read data from other Modbus devices into
• T
Tags of the CPU.

• The MRX instruction can be used for Modbus TCP or Modbus RTU. There are several
status bits that can be used to determine whether the read message was successful and if it was
not, the reason why.

6-28

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 6: Communications

Modbus Instructions, cont’d
There is an “Automatic Polling” feature in the instruction to make it easier to read a device on a
pre-determined poll rate. There is also a “poll offset” field that can be used when simultaneous
instructions are enabled with the Automatic Polling feature to help stagger the flow of messages
being sent to the network.
• The Modbus Write (MWX) instruction is very similar in layout and configuration to the
MRX instruction. It is used to write values to a Modbus device from the tags in the CPU.

• The MWX operates very similarly to the MRX instruction. There are also many status bits to
indicate the success or reason for failure when sending a message.
• The Automatic Polling option is also available to the MWX instruction, although greater care
should be taken when using this feature in this instruction. This is explained in better detail in
the “Message Queue” section.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

6-29

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 6: Communications

Network Instructions
The Network Read (RX) and Network Write (WX) instructions are used to communicate to
other CPU’s. They are very similar in operation to the MRX and MWX instructions but they
target Tag Names instead of Modbus addresses in the other CPU. There is also a significant
performance gain in using the RX and WX instructions when communicating to other CPU’s
as opposed to using the MRX and MWX instructions.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

The same status bits are available in the RX instruction as in the MRX instruction and operate
in the same manner. The greatest difference in the RX versus the MRX is that with the RX,
the Tag Name in the target CPU can be referenced directly and does not need a corresponding
Modbus address. The way this is accomplished is by mapping local and remote tagnames
together within the local CPU’s RX instruction. Once the instruction is set up to read a remote
project, the “Tags of Remote Project” or “Array Tags of Remote Project” drop down lists will
be accessible. Map the Tag of the Remote project to a Tag in the Local project to read this
data.

6-30

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 6: Communications

Network Instructions, cont’d
The WX instruction operates in the same manner except that the data from the Local tags will
be written into the Tags of the remote project. No Modbus mapping is required.

NOTE: The PC programming software project for the Remote CPU must be accessible by the PC running the
programming software for the Local project.

Automatic Poll versus Manual Polling and Interlocking
In many cases when performing multiple communications requests to other devices, the
message flow must be explicitly controlled in ladder code so that a message is not sent while
another one is in operation. This usually requires writing ‘interlocking’ code between the
instructions which typically involves the use of timers and shift registers, etc. Sometimes this
is necessary because of the application but in other cases where the CPU just wants to read
changing values from other devices and the frequency of that update is not critical it would be
much more efficient to skip the unnecessary code complexity of interlocking.
The desire to make it easier to communicate to other devices brought about the “Automatic
Polling” feature and the “Message Queue” in the CPU. The Automatic Polling feature allows
the user to choose the rate at which messages are sent without having to use a separate timer and
enabling logic. The ‘Message Queue’ allows the user to stage the messages from the ladder code
to go out to each physical communications port without requiring interlocking logic.
1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

6-31

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 6: Communications

Network Instructions, cont’d

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

The implementation of how the message
queue works is slightly different based on
whether the request is a read request or a
write request.
Write requests will fill the queue much
faster than read requests. That’s why
it is advisable to carefully choose when
doing write requests whether to use the
“Automatic Poll” feature or to manually
send write requests only when needed (data
to write has changed). When designing a
system, it is important to know the total time it takes to send a request and get a reply for
each target device. The Poll time should be longer than this time. The longer the poll time
can be, within tolerance of the application, the better the overall network performance. So for
efficiency in programming and for the best possible performance for the system, conservative
poll rates should be used when utilizing the “Automatic Poll” feature.
There is also a “Poll offset” field in the communications instructions. This helps prevent the
instructions from being queued all at the same time. When the CPU project starts, a master
timer begins. The ladder scan will look to see if the instruction is enabled. If it is enabled, it
will begin the Automatic Poll timer at the specified poll offset value from the master time clock.

6-32

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 6: Communications

Message Queue
If the application requires more explicit, orderly control of each message sent to the devices,
turn off the “Automatic Poll” feature. Using the instruction’s status bits, logically control each
message as required.
All of the above explains how messages get into the “queue”. There are several factors involved
with how each queue (1 for each physical port) is emptied.
• Serial port queues: The serial port queues empty slower than the Ethernet port queues, not
just because of the hardware speed itself but because of the nature of serial communications.
Each request sent must wait for a response or a timeout (whichever comes first). Once the
reply is received for a request or a timeout has occurred, the next item in the list can be sent.
So the response time of the slave devices on the network will largely affect the speed at which
the queue fills and empties.
• Ethernet port queues: The Ethernet port queue can empty faster because when sending
requests to multiple devices, the CPU does not have to wait on a response from one device
before sending a request to another device due to the inherent nature of the Ethernet
hardware. However, sending multiple requests to the same Ethernet device does necessitate
that the CPU waits for a response from the first request before sending another request to that
same device.

Another difference in the Ethernet port queue versus the Serial port queue spawns from the
TCP ‘connection’ based behavior of Modbus TCP. If a TCP connection is lost to a device
and there are still requests in the queue for that device, those requests will be dropped from the
queue. There are three ways this can happen:
1. If a TCP timeout occurs (server device fails to respond within specified timeout value), the TCP
connection is lost.
2.

If the server device closes the connection, then all of the requests will be dropped.

3. And, finally, if all rungs with communications instructions to a device are disabled for five
seconds, the CPU will drop the TCP connection for that device in order to free up valuable
resources that could be used elsewhere in the system.

This is another factor that should be considered when designing the system. If it is imperative
that no message be lost when communicating to a device, each instruction should be explicitly
handled one by one (interlocking logic).

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

6-33

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 6: Communications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

EtherNet/IP for the Productivity Series
Terminology Definitions
A lot of terminology associated with EtherNet/IP is not always clear. Some of these terms are
listed below along with their respective definitions.
• Scanner: This is the term used to describe the device that initiates the EtherNet/IP sessions.
The Scanner is sometimes referred to as the “Originator” as well. In more standard Ethernet
terms, the Scanner would often be called the “Client”.
• Adapter: This is the device that responds to the EtherNet/IP communications that are
initiated by the Scanner. The Adapter is also known as the “Target” as well. Typically, the
Adapter is an Ethernet “Server”.
• Object: In EtherNet/IP, an Object is a representation of a defined set of Ethernet
connections, behaviors, services and data attributes. There are standard objects and there are
custom defined objects as well. See Object Modeling example below.
• Class: A Class is a set of Objects that are related in some fashion. See Object Modeling
example below.
• Instance: An Instance is an actual, usable manifestation of an Object. See Object Modeling
example below.
• Attributes: Attributes are the specific items within an Object Class. The category of
Attributes should be the same for all Instances of an Object but the actual Attribute itself
might vary. See Object Modeling example below.
• Connection Point: A Connection Point value is the “Class Code” reference for a data block.
This value is required for access to input and output data in IO Messaging. It is typically
defined for each input and output data block by the Adapter device manufacturer.
• IO Messaging: IO Messaging (also called “Implicit Messaging”) is a method of reading and
writing blocks of data without defining the Connection Point and size for each block transfer.
The Connection Point, size and transfer rate (RPI) are defined at the beginning and then the
data blocks are transferred at the specified intervals.
• Explicit Messaging: This method of reading or writing data requires that each message defines
the type of data and size of data needed for each request.
Object Modeling Example:
Class ------- Definition of Automobile
Attributes -- Make, Model, etc…
Object ------ A Ford Mustang
Instance ----Sally’s Ford Mustang

6-34

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 6: Communications

Network Layer Chart

The diagram above illustrates the OSI seven layer model and how EtherNet/IP fits into this
model. In general, there are three basic layers for sending and receiving data in the EtherNet/
IP protocol:
• EtherNet/IP layer (Register Session, etc…)
• CIP layer (CIP Forward Open, etc…)
• The uppermost layer,which contains several different types of messaging.
The ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor Association) specification defines many different types
of messaging that reside on the CIP layer. Two types of messaging supported in the phase
1 release of the Productivity Series EtherNet/IP protocol are I/O Messaging and Explicit
Messaging. I/O Messaging is accomplished through a Class 1 Connection and Explicit
Messaging can be accomplished through a Class 3 Connection or an Unconnected Message.
Tag Based Messaging (used for reading and writing values to Allen Bradley Control and
CompactLogix PLCs) and PCCC (used for reading and writing values to Allen Bradley
MicroLogix and SLC PLCs) are planned for subsequent phases of this protocol.

EtherNet/IP Data
When doing I/O Messaging, the data that is transported is defined as “Input” data and
“Output” data. Don’t confuse this type of data with what most PLCs define as Input data and
Output data. In most PLCs, Inputs are typically associated with an Input module that reads
points from real word devices. Outputs are typically associated with an Output module that
turns off and on real word devices.
In I/O Messaging, Input data is data that is sent from the target device back to the Originator
or to multiple devices that are listening (multicast messages). Output data is data that is sent
from the Target device. This data may or may not be connected to real word devices. That
is completely dependent upon the Adapter device. For example: When the Productivity1000
is configured as an EtherNet/IP Adapter device, the Input data and Output data is defined in
internal data arrays and does not directly tie to any Input and Output point to the real world.
If it is desired to tie these array elements to real word devices, that must be accomplished in
code by Copy commands (or other instructions).
NOTE: The Scanner (originator) in the P1000 will only accept messages from an Adapter (target) device with
an established connection with a Scanner. The Adapter (target) in the P1000 will respond back to a Scanner
(originator) in the method (Multicast or Unicast) that is sent in the forward open message from the Scanner
(originator).

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

6-35

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 6: Communications

Class 1 and Class 3 Connections
What are they and how are they best used?

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

• Class 1 Connection is the transport mechanism that IO Messaging uses to send data. The
basic concept is that data is sent in one direction: the Originator sends Output data in a
Unicast UDP message to the Target and the Target sends Input data in either a Unicast
message back to the Originator or Multicast UDP messages to multiple devices. The Input
data and Output data messages have no relationship to each other. This method works well
for Remote I/O type data and is very efficient due to little overhead and reduced handshaking
messages on the wire. Class 3 Connection is one of the mechanisms that Explicit messaging
uses. Class 3 messaging uses TCP messages unlike Class 1. Each Class 3 request has a
header that defines the type of data requested as well as the size requested. It allows for more
flexibility in messaging but does create additional overhead.
NOTE: Explicit messaging can be accomplished with unconnected messages as well for more infrequent
requests. Explicit messaging is a slower performing method of communications but it typically allows for
more flexibility and control when the situation requires it.

When can the P1000 CPU use Class 1 or Class 3 Connections?
• Class 1 and Class 3 Connections can be accomplished with the Productivity1000 CPU as an
Adapter or as a Scanner or both simultaneously.

How many connections can the Productivity1000 support for EtherNet/IP?
• 4 - TCP
• 4 - EtherNet IP
• 4 - CIP (Up to 4 CIP connections are allowed per EtherNet/IP connection. Therefore, if one
device can support 4 CIP connections then you can have up to a total of 16 CIP connections
using 4 devices)

Setup Example: Productivity1000 as EtherNet/IP Adapter
The Adapter setup is accomplished through the EtherNet/IP Adapter setup under the Comm
Adapter Config section of the Setup menu as seen on right.
When the EtherNet/IP Adapter is selected from the menu the window shown here will open.

6-36

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 6: Communications
Fill in the required parameters and once configured these parameters will be used to configure
the Scanner side as shown in the examples below. The first example shows how to setup a
Class 1 IO Message connection from a 3rd party EtherNet/IP Scanner device (an Allen Bradley
PLC).

The following example shows how a Class 3 Explicit Message might be accomplished from a
3rd party device (Allen Bradley PLC). As you can see the Input Data must be retrieved in one
connection or message and the output data in another. Remember that Class 3 messaging is
not as efficient in protocol messaging as Class 1 but it does allow for granular control.
NOTE: In this example, size configuration is not shown on the Scanner side. The tag created for the
Destination must be large enough to contain the data requested (shown with dashed boxes).

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

6-37

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 6: Communications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
6-38

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 6: Communications

Setup Example: Productivity1000 as EtherNet/IP Scanner
This example shows how to connect the Productivity1000 Scanner function to an EtherNet/
IP adapter device using Class 1 I/O Messaging. First, create an EtherNet/IP device in the

Hardware Configuration as seen
below:
Configure the parameters to
match the settings of the Adapter
device. The image on right shows
the setup of the Input data.
The size, in this case, is dynamic
to the configuration of the device.
For this particular example, we
configured the device in a manner
that allows it to publish 8 bytes
of data for Input. Many devices
will have a fixed configuration
that should be published in the
manufacturer’s documentation.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

6-39

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 6: Communications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

The Output data must also be
configured. Its data is also dynamic
based upon the configuration. In
our example, we configured the
device in a manner that caused it to
require 8 bytes of Output data.

The image on left shows the setup for the
Configuration data. The Configuration data, for
most devices, is a fixed size. Some devices will
require that the Configuration data Connection
Point be included in the Forward Open message
(as shown on left) even if the size is 0. Some
devices will require that the Configuration data
Connection Point not be in the Forward Open
and the checkbox option in the image below
would need to be de-selected.

6-40

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 6: Communications
The following example shows how to connect the Productivity1000 Scanner function to an
EtherNet/IP Adapter device using Class 3 Explicit Messaging. As with IO Messaging, an
EtherNet/IP device must be created in the Hardware Configuration as seen below:

Explicit Messages can be performed in 2 ways: Unconnected or Connected (Class 3). The
advantage of using Unconnected messaging is it allows more discrete control of each request.
The disadvantage of Unconnected messaging is that Unconnected messages have a lower
priority and will take longer to get serviced on some devices. Connected messages get serviced
faster since there is a connection established to the device. If Connected messaging is desired,
create an Explicit Message tab as shown in the image above. If Unconnected messaging is
desired, do not create an Explicit Message tab. Only fill out the information in the upper
portion of the EtherNet/IP Client Properties window.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

6-41

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 6: Communications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Once the desired parameters have been entered, the device may now be referenced in the
Explicit Message Instruction. If Unconnected messaging has been selected, choose the
Unconnected MSG option in the Connection drop down box. If Connected messaging has
been selected, choose the Explicit Message that was configured in the EtherNet/IP Client
Properties window in the Connection drop down box. The rest of the settings should be
matched to the specifications documented by the manufacturer. An example for requesting
the Identity of a device is shown below. The data array configured for this function must be
sufficient in size to hold the returned data from the device for this object. Data can also be
written to the device if it supports an object for this purpose. If data is being written, enable the
Output selection and specify the data array and size required by that device’s object.

Troubleshooting Tips:
1. Use the diagnostic tags in the Hardware Configuration and Explicit Message Instruction:
As explained previously in the Network Layer Chart section, there are multiple layers
of messaging involved with EtherNet/IP. If it appears that the Productivity1000 is not
communicating with another EtherNet/IP device, there are diagnostic tags available to
narrow down which layer of the protocol is preventing successful communications.

6-42

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 6: Communications
a. At the TCP layer, there is a TCP Connected field that will expose the status of the TCP/IP
connection when a tag is populated in this field.
b. There is an Adapter Name field for a String tag and a Vendor ID field for an Integer tag.
Both of these fields can help to identify whether the Productivity1000 is connected to the
correct device or not.
c. At the CIP layer, there is a Connection Online field for a Boolean tag.
d. There are three additional fields to help determine why the CIP session might not be
successful: General Status for an Integer tag, Extended Status for an Integer Data Array and
Status Description for a String tag.

2. Use the TCP connected tag:
First check the TCP Connected tag. If the connection has been enabled (by turning
on the tag configured in the Enable field or triggering an Explicit Message instruction
with an Unconnected MSG specified) and the TCP Connected tag is not true, check the
following items:
a. Cabling. Ensure that all of the cables are connected and in good shape. In most cases, the
Ethernet port that the cable is connected to should indicate a Link Good LED. Ensure that
any interim Ethernet switches are powered up and functioning and that the end device is
powered up and functional.
b. IP address and correct subnet. Check that the IP address entered into the IP Address field
is the correct address for the device that you are connecting to. Also check that the EtherNet/
IP device’s IP address and subnet mask is compatible with the IP address and subnet mask
of the Productivity1000. If there are any routers in between the two, ensure that a proper
default gateway that matches the router’s IP address is configured. If you are unfamiliar with
proper IP addressing and subnet configuration, consult with the network administrator for
guidance.
c. TCP Port number. The default listening TCP port number for EtherNet/IP is 44818.
Check that the target device is listening on this specific port number. If it is not, change the
value in TCP Port Number field to the appropriate value. If there are interim router devices
that are using port forwarding, ensure that the router is properly configured for this setup.
NOTE: Attempting to do IO Messaging across routers (different subnets) is unlikely to be successful. IO
Messaging uses multicast messaging in many cases and the Port number is not necessarily fixed when the
IO Messaging is established (the Forward Open message has the ability to ‘negotiate’ the port number used
for the IO Messages).

d. Adapter Name and Vendor ID. If the network contains many EtherNet/IP devices and
these devices may not necessarily be connected to the Productivity1000, it may be a good
safeguard to check the Adapter Name and Vendor ID returned and verify that these devices
are the correct devices to which it is connected.

3. Use the Connection Online and Error tags:
If the TCP Connected tag is true and the Adapter Name and Vendor ID look correct, the next
tags to look at are the Connection Online, the General Status, the Extended Status and the Status
Description.
If the Enable tag is true and the Connection Online tag is not true, check the General Status value
along with the Extended Status value(s) and the Status Description. If the General Status value and
the Extended Status value(s) are part of the defined errors from the ODVA specification, the Status
Description should also return a more descriptive String. Once these errors are known, it may be
possible to very simply make the adjustment in the settings to correct the issue.
1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

6-43

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 6: Communications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

If it is not obvious from the description, first check the manufacturer’s documentation for corrective
action in this particular scenario.
If the manufacturer’s documentation doesn’t give corrective action, check the EtherNet/IP Error
Code List in this chapter for possible solutions.
NOTE: This may not always solve the problem as each device manufacturer may publish the error for slightly
different reasons.

If the Connection Online tag is true and the data being received is different than what is expected,
verify that the correct Connection Point values and/or Class, Instance, Attribute values are
configured. There may be multiple areas of available data in that device. Verify that the correct data
types are being used for both sides. If the data types are mismatched, this may make the data ‘appear’
to be incorrect.
Another great tool that can be used is Wireshark. Wireshark is a free network analyzer tool that can
be downloaded from www.wireshark.com.
NOTE: Using this tool implies some knowledge of how networking protocols function. Using Wireshark will
also require that you have a true Ethernet hub (not an unmanaged switch) or a managed switch with Port
mirroring capability.

You may also use the following basic steps to check your EtherNet/IP Setup.

EtherNet/IP I/O Message Troubleshooting:
1. Does the IP Address set up in the Scanner match the Adapter IP Address?
2. Is the enable tag entered into the Scanner turned ON?
3. D
oes the connection point entered into the I/O Message Data Block match the connection point
of the Adapter?
4. Does the number of elements match the Adapter?
5. Does the data type match the Adapter?
Steps 4 & 5 are important because the number of bytes being read from or written to the Adapter
have to match the Adapter bytes allocated.

EtherNet/IP Explicit Message Troubleshooting:
1. Does the IP Address set up in the Scanner match the Adapter IP Address?
2. I s the enable tag entered into the Scanner turned ON when not using the Unconnected MSG
connection type?
3. M
ake sure the logic for the EtherNet/IP Explicit Message (EMSG) is TRUE so the instruction is
enabled.
4. W
hen using Get or Set single attributes in the Service field make sure the Instance ID matches the
Instance ID of the Adapter.
5. W
hen using Generic in the Service field make sure the Service ID, Class ID, Attribute ID and
Instance ID match the Adapter settings.
6. Does the number of elements match the Adapter?
7. Does the data type match the Adapter?
Steps 6 & 7 are important because the number of bytes being read from or written to the Adapter
have to match the Adapter bytes allocated.

6-44

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 6: Communications

ProNET
Productivity Network (ProNET) provides the ability to share data with other P-Series
CPU’s, This can easily be accomplished using the Productivity Network (PNET) setup in
the Hardware Configuration window used to join a data sharing network consisting of other
P-Series controllers.
Each member of the data sharing network receives data from all of the other P-Series controllers
on that data sharing network. Each node can optionally send data to the other nodes of the data
sharing network by electing to “publish” data.
The ProNET configuration uses UDP broadcast packets to publish the blocks of data to the
network. One caveat with the use of broadcast packets is that it limits the scope of the shared
data network to the local broadcast domain.
ProNET uses the verbs ‘publishing’ and ‘subscribing’ to describe how the controller data is
exchanged with other P-Series controllers on the data sharing network.
Publishing is analogous to sending data, and is done only if ProNET is configured to ‘publish’
one or more of its assigned tags. If so configured, the P-Series controller will broadcast a packet
that contains the data from the selected tags.
Subscribing is analogous to receiving data, and is accomplished by ‘subscribing to’ a publisher’s
global ID of any P-Series CPU on the data sharing network set up to publish its data.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

6-45

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 6: Communications
The ProNET configuration works with a 1D array tag(s) that can contain up to 65535
elements, however you are limited to 32 total 32-bit elements, 64 total 16-bit elements, or 128
total 8-bit or Boolean elements of data per publisher array data type. These tags provide the
local storage for the data sent and received over the data-sharing network.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

NOTE: The message size for each data type is limited to 128 bytes regardless of the defined array size.

Data Type

Number of
Elements

Boolean

128

Integer 8-Bit

128

Integer 16-Bit

Integer 32-Bit

Integer 64-Bit

When the input logic to the ProNET configuration is Enabled, it operates at a fixed rate of 10
times per second (100 msec.), the instruction will publish all of the elements of the array that it
is configured to publish, and will process any ProNET nodes that it receives. When the input
logic is OFF, (the device is disabled), it DOES NOT publish any of its tags and DOES NOT
process any ProNET nodes that it receives.

6-46

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 6: Communications

Custom Protocol over Ethernet Functionality
Besides Modbus RTU, EtherNet/IP, and ProNET the Productivity1000 system has the ability to
communicate via Ethernet with other devices using the Custom Protocol over Ethernet (CPoE).

Custom Protocol over Ethernet
The Custom Protocol is a HEX based protocol used to communicate with devices that do
not support one of the other protocols on Productivity1000. There are two steps to initiate
communications via the Custom Protocol over Ethernet:
•

First you must set up a device in the hardware configuration under the CPoE tab.

•

Then you must use the Custom Protocol Ethernet( CPE) instruction to initiate messages.

Hardware Configuration
First you must set up a device to talk to in the CPoE tab of the hardware configuration. This
will Require you to:
1.

Enter a Device Name

Enter the IP Address of the device you wish to communicate with.

Enter the port number of the device.

Enter an Enable tag to enable the device if using TCP.

Choose whether you wish to Use the PLC as the master or the slave device via TCP connection

Choose whether you wish to use a UDP connection.

Enter tags for status of this device for troubleshooting (Example below shows the Structure
method used).

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

6-47

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 6: Communications

Custom Protocol Ethernet Instruction
Next you must use the Custom Protocol Ethernet instruction in ladder.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

The instruction can be chosen Receive or Send messages to the Custom Device.

The user can choose to use:
• A table with tags that allow the user to send a specific data.
• An array tag that is numerical can be used to Send/Receive from.
• A string tag that contains an ASCII string to be sent or string location to receive characters to.

6-48

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 6: Communications

Communications: Port Configuration
The Communications Port Configuration for any module containing comm ports is accessed from
the Hardware Configuration window. For example, to access the P1-540 communications port
configuration, first select the CPU from
the Hardware Configuration window by
double left-clicking or by right-clicking the
CPU and selecting Open from the drop
down menu. This will display the P1-540
configuration window seen here.
The following descriptions will focus on the
P1-540 communications ports.

Ethernet Configuration
Ethernet Ports: The 10/100Base-T
Ethernet port on the P1-540 CPU.
•

thernet: The Ethernet port can
E
connect to Modbus TCP Client
devices, Modbus TCP Server devices
and PCs running the Productivity1000
programming software. The Ethernet
Port is configured with an IP Address,
Subnet Mask and Default Gateway,
allowing it to function seamlessly on a
typical LAN network.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

6-49

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 6: Communications

External Ethernet Port Settings

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

NOTE: Two CPU Remote I/O networks cannot co-exist on the same LAN.

a. Port Name: Allows the entry of a unique Name for the Ethernet Port. This Name is referenced in
the Communications instructions (MRX, MWX, RX, WX) to select the Port to send the request
from.
b. Port Security Option: This Option can be used as a simple Security measure to prevent Modbus
TCP write requests from being accepted by the CPU. To allow Reads and Writes, select Read/Write.
c. TCP/IP Settings: The IP Setting of this Port may be changed in several ways:
• The settings may be entered manually in the Choose CPU tool in the Productivity Suite
programming software. This allows the user to make changes to the IP to allow connection
by the computer running the Productivity Suite programming software. Changes are sent
using Multicast Messages.
• The TCP/IP Settings can be saved as part of the project. This must be Enabled in the
P1-540 Hardware Configuration Settings by selecting Use the Following (Item f below). If
handled this way, the Settings stored in the project will take effect at Project Transfer and at
boot up only. The Settings may be changed after boot up.
d. Use Current Settings: When selected, Project Transfer or boot up will not make changes to the
TCP/IP Settings of the CPU.
e. Use DHCP: This specifies that the CPU should request its IP Settings from a DHCP Server on the
network.
NOTE: If the CPU is set to use DHCP for it’s IP Settings it cannot, in all likelihood, be used as a Modbus TCP
Server.

f. Use The Following: If this Option is selected, the CPU will set itself to the specified project Settings
upon Project Transfer or at boot up.
g. IP Address: This field is where the IP Address is specified in Four Octets.
• For Example: 192.168.1.5
h. Subnet Mask: This field is where the Subnet Mask is specified in Four Octets (i.e., 255.255.255.0 ).
The Subnet Mask is used in conjunction with the IP Address to configure a Logical Network.
i. Default Gateway: This field is where the Default Gateway Address is specified in Four Octets (i.e.,
192.168.1.1). This is typically the IP Address of the router on the network. If a target IP Address is
specified in an outgoing message from the CPU that is not in the
Local Subnet, the Default Gateway Address is where this message
will be sent.
j. Timeout Between Data Query and Response: The Time period
specified in this field is the Time between the queries sent from the
CPU (via a Communication instruction, such as a MRX, MWX,
RX or WX) and the Time a response from that device is received.
If the Response takes longer to receive or is not received within the
specified Time period, a Timeout Error will occur for the given
instruction. Each instruction has a Timeout Status bit that can be
assigned to it.

6-50

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 6: Communications
k. Modbus TCP Port: This is the listening TCP Port Number for Modbus TCP connections. If
necessary, this value can be adjusted for advanced router access. In most situations, this Port
Number should be left at 502.
l. Comm Heartbeat Value: This feature allows the ladder logic in the CPU to know if a device has
stopped communicating to the CPU. If a value is placed in this field, the CPU will start a timer
between each communication packet coming in to the CPU. If a communication packet fails to be
received by the CPU within the specified time period, the System Bit Ethernet Heartbeat Timeout
Bit will become true.

Local Ethernet Port Settings
m. Timeout Between Data Query and Response: The Time period specified in this field is the Time
between the queries sent from the CPU (for Remote I/O Nodes and GS Drive Nodes) and the Time
a Response from that device is Received. If the Response takes longer to receive (or is not received)
than the specified Time period, a Timeout Error will occur for the given device and an Error will be
generated in the Error Log. See Modbus Server diagram shown on previous page.
n. Comm Heartbeat Value: This value specifies how long the Remote I/O Slaves should wait for a
communication packet from the CPU. If a communication packet is not received from the CPU
within the specified time period, all outputs on the Remote Slave will be turned OFF.

Remote Access Configuration
a. Web Server Function: Provides the ability to make a non secure web connection to the P1-540 in
order to access the USB pen drive and view read-only system tags. When enabled, a port number
selection is required.
• Port: (Default 80) Allows user to set a port number ranging from 1-65535.

b. Session Timeout: Allows the user to set a specific time limit (1-20 mins.) on inactivity that will
close the Web Server connection. If there is no activity between the PC and the Web Server for the
specified time limit, the connection will close.
c. Enable Web Server Function: Select this box to enable/disable Web Server Function > See (a) above.
d. Mobile Function: Enables Remote Access which allows the CPU Data Remote Monitor App to
monitor the selected tags.
e. Password Option: Allows the user to set a password for access to the Web Server.
• Enter an account name and password of up to a combination of 16 numbers and characters
(can include special characters).

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

6-51

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 6: Communications

Serial Configuration

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

When the Serial Ports Tab is selected, the Serial Ports settings are displayed as shown below.

There are two Serial Ports on the P1-540 CPU; an RS-232 Port with an RJ-12 connector and
a 2-wire RS-485 Port with a removable three point terminal block. Both Ports are capable
of Modbus RTU Client (device that initiates communications requests) and Server (device
that responds to communications requests) communications. They are also capable of ASCII
outgoing strings and incoming strings.

RS-232 and RS-485 Port Settings
a. Port Name: Allows the entry of a unique name for the RS-232 and RS-485 Ports. This name
is referenced inside of the Communications instructions (MRX, MWX, RX, WX) and ASCII
instructions (AIN, AOUT, CPO, CPI) to select the Port to send or receive the request.
b. Port Security: This Option can be used as a simple Security measure to prevent Modbus TCP
write requests from being accepted by the CPU. To allow Reads and Writes, select Read/Write.
c. Protocol: This field determines whether the Port is used for Modbus RTU communications,
sending or receiving ASCII Strings or performing the Custom Protocol function.
d.
Baud Rate: Choose the Baud Rate that your device and the CPU should communicate in this field.
The appropriate choice will vary greatly with device, application and environment. The important
point is that all devices communicating on the network need to be set to the same Baud Rate. The
available Baud Rates are 1200, 2400, 9600, 19200, 33600, 38400, 57600 and 115200 bps.

6-52

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 6: Communications

RS-232 and RS-485 Port Settings, cont’d
e. Node Address: This field is used only when the CPU is a Modbus RTU Server device. This
field is used to uniquely identify the CPU on the network. This setting is also sometimes referred
to as a Station Address. This field can be set from 1 to 247.
f. Parity: The Parity Bit is used as a simple, low-level form of Error Detection. All devices on the
network need to be at the same Parity setting. The appropriate choice will vary with devices.
Valid selections are None, Even and Odd.
g. Data Bits: This field determines whether the communications packet uses Seven Data Bits or
Eight Data Bits. Eight Data Bits is the only valid selection for Modbus RTU. Either Seven or
Eight Data Bits can be selected when using ASCII communications. Set this field to match the
device that is connected to the CPU.
h. Stop Bits: This field determines whether the communications packet uses One or Two Stop
Bits. Set this field to match the device that is connected to the CPU.
i.
RTS Mode: This field allows selection of whether or not RTS is asserted during data
transmission. Used for hardware handshaking in the standard way. You may need to manually
configure RTS. Refer to your instrument documentation to determine its specific behavior.

j. RTS Off Delay Time (RS-232 Only): This Time period is the amount of Time between the
end of the data transmission to when the RTS signal is turned off. The diagram below illustrates
this. This setting may be needed when using media converters (RS-232 to RS-422/485
converters) and/or radio modems. A delay may be needed at the end of the data transmission
for processing time in the devices.

k. RTS On Delay Time (RS-232 Only): This Time period
is the amount of Time between when the RTS Signal is
turned ON and the data transmission begins. The diagram
above illustrates this. This setting may be needed when
using media converters (RS-232 to RS-485 converters)
and/or radio modems. A delay may be needed after the
assertion of the RTS Signal and when the data transmission
begins for processing time in the device.
l. Timeout Between Query and Response: The Time period
specified in this field is the Time between the queries sent
from the CPU (via a Communication instruction, such as
an MRX, MWX, RX, or WX) and the Time a Response
from that device is Received. If the Response takes longer
to receive (or is not received) than the specified Time period, a Timeout Error will occur for the
given instruction. Each instruction has a Timeout Status bit that can be assigned to it.
1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

6-53

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 6: Communications

RS-232 and RS-485 Port Settings, cont’d
m. Modbus Character Timeout: The Modbus Character Delay Time is specified as the Time
between two bytes (or characters) within a given Modbus Message. The Modbus RTU
specification states that this time must be no more than 1.5 Character Times (real time based
on Baud Rate). Sometimes delays do occur between bytes when using radio modems, media
converters, etc. This setting allows some tolerance in these situations for the incoming Modbus
Messages in the CPU. The CPU will wait for the amount of time specified in this field before
discarding the incomplete packet. If the CPU does not receive the remainder of the Message
within the specified Time Frame, it will discard the first portion of the Message and wait for a
new Message.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

n. Response/Request Delay (RS-485 Only): This setting is used when the CPU is a Modbus RTU
Server or Client on the RS-485 Port.
The total Response Time can be up to the Total CPU Scan Time + the Value specified in this
field. When using 2-wire RS-485 communications, sometimes Echoes can occur since both
devices use the same differential signal pair to send and receive.
• If acting as a Server (on left below), upon receiving a Modbus Request, the CPU will wait
for the time period specified in this field before sending a Response. This can be used with
slow clients that need extra time to change from sending to receiving.
• If acting as a Client (on right below), after receiving a Modbus Response, the CPU will
wait for the time period specified in this field before sending another Request. This can be
used to delay request messages in order to give extra time for slow server devices.

o. Comm Heartbeat Value: This feature allows the ladder logic in the CPU to know if a device
has stopped communicating to the CPU. If a value is placed in this field, the CPU will start
a timer between each communication packet coming in to the CPU. If a communication
packet fails to be received by the CPU within the specified Time period, the System Bit RS-232
Heartbeat Timeout Bit or RS-485 Heartbeat Timeout Bit will become true.

6-54

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 6: Communications

Communications: Error Codes
NOTE: The only time you will see Communications Error Codes is when the CPU is the Master of a
Communications Network.

To simplify the process of identifying a possible Error, the Productivity1000 CPU will
automatically report to a specific memory location an Error Code that helps identify the
existing issue. The Error Codes are reported in the Exception Response String Tag specified in
the instruction as shown below.

The Exception Response String field is available on the following instructions:
• GS Drives Read

• GS Drives Write

• Modbus Read

• Modbus Write

• Network Read

• Network Write

• Dataworx Request
The Table shown below provides a list of Productivity1000 Communication Error Codes that
may be reported by the Productivity CPU.
Productivity1000 Communication Error Codes
Error Code

Description

Suggested Fix

Function Code not supported.

Check instruction or connected device
and correct Function code or address
range selected.

Address out of range. This error is typically
generated when a Modbus address has been
requested that does not exist in the CPU.

Check instruction or connected device
and correct Function code or address
range selected.

Illegal Data Value. This error is typically
generated when the Modbus request sent to
the CPU is formed incorrectly.

Check the Modbus request against the
Modbus protocol specification (www.
modbus.org) to verify that it was formed
correctly.

Device Failure.

Check connected device.

Slave Device is Busy. This error is typically
due to excess communications to the EDRV.

Slow down the poll rate in the GS
instruction.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

6-55

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 6: Communications

P1000 EtherNet/IP Error Codes

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

P1000 EtherNet/IP Error Codes
General Extended Status
Status Error
Error

0x01

6-56

Name

Description

0x0100

Connection In Use/
Duplicate Forward
Open

A connection is already established from the target
device sending a Forward Open request or the target
device has sent multiple forward open request. This
could be caused by poor network traffic. Check the
cabling, switches and connections.

0x0103

Transport Class/
Trigger Combination
not supported

The Transport class and trigger combination is not
supported. The Productivity1000 CPU only supports
Class 1 and Class 3 transports and triggers: Change of
State and Cyclic.

0x0106

0x0107

0x0108

Owner Conflict

Target Connection
Not Found

Invalid Network
Connection
Parameter

An existing exclusive owner has already configured a
connection to this Connection Point. Check to see if
other Scanner devices are connected to this adapter
or verify that Multicast is supported by adapter device
if Multicast is selected for Forward Open. This could
be caused by poor network traffic. Check the cabling,
switches and connections.
This occurs if a device sends a Forward Close on a
connection and the device can’t find this connection.
This could occur if one of these devices has powered
down or if the connection timed out on a bad
connection. This could be caused by poor network
traffic. Check the cabling, switches and connections.
This error occurs when one of the parameters
specified in the Forward Open message is not
supported such as Connection Point, Connection type,
Connection priority, redundant owner or exclusive
owner. The Productivity1000 CPU does not return
this error and will instead use errors 0x0120, 0x0121,
0x0122, 0x0123, 0x0124, 0x0125 or 0x0132 instead.
This error occurs when the target device doesn’t
support the requested connection size. Check the
documentation of the manufacturer’s device to verify
the correct Connection size required by the device.
Note that most devices specify this value in terms of
bytes. The Productivity1000 CPU does not return this
error and will instead use errors 0x0126, 0x0127 and
0x0128.

0x0109

Invalid Connection
Size

0x0110

Target for
Connection Not
Configured

This error occurs when a message is received with a
connection number that does not exist in the target
device. This could occur if the target device has
powered down or if the connection timed out. This
could be caused by poor network traffic. Check the
cabling, switches and connections.

RPI Not Supported

This error occurs if the Originator is specifying an RPI
that is not supported. The Productivity1000 CPU will
accept a minimum value of 10ms on a CIP Forward
Open request. However, the CPU will produce at the
specified rate up to the scan time of the installed
project. The CPU cannot product any faster than the
scan time of the running project.

0x0111

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

P1000
Supported

Chapter 6: Communications
P1000 EtherNet/IP Error Codes
General Extended Status
Status Error
Error

Name

Description

P1000
Supported

This error can be returned if the Originator is
specifying an RPI value that is not acceptable. There
may be six additional values following the extended
error code with the acceptable values. An array can
be defined for this field in order to view the extended
error code attributes. If the Target device supports
extended status, the format of the values will be as
shown below:
• U
nsigned Integer 16, Value = 0x0112, Explanation:
Extended Status code

0x01

0x0112

• |Unsigned Integer 8, Value = variable, Explanation:
Acceptable Originator to Target RPI type, values:
0 = The RPI specified in the forward open was
acceptable (O -> T value is ignored), 1 = unspecified
(use a different RPI), 2 = minimum acceptable RPI
(too fast), 3 = maximum acceptable RPI (too slow),
4 = required RPI to corrected mismatch (data is
already being consumed at a different RPI), 5 to 255
= reserved.

RPI Value not
acceptable

• U
nsigned Integer 32, Value = variable, Explanation:
Value of O -> T RPI that is within the acceptable
range for the application.
• U
nsigned Integer 32, Value = variable, Explanation:
Value of T -> O RPI that is within the acceptable
range for the application.
The Productivity1000 EtherNet/IP Adapter connection
limit of 4 when doing Class 3 connections has been
reached. An existing connection must be dropped in
order for a new one to be generated.

0x01

0x0113

Out of Connections

0x01

0x0114

The compatibility bit was set in the Forward Open
Vendor ID or Product
message but the Vendor ID or Product Code did not
Code Mismatch
match.

0x01

0x0115

Device Type
Mismatch

The compatibility bit was set in the Forward Open
message but the Device Type did not match.

0x01

0x0116

Revision Mismatch

The compatibility bit was set in the Forward Open
message but the major and minor revision numbers
were not a valid revision.

0x0117

Invalid Produced
or Consumed
Application Path

This error is returned from the Target device when the
Connection Point parameters specified for the O -> T
(Output) or T -> O (Input) connection is incorrect or not
supported. The Productivity1000 CPU does not return
this error and uses the following error codes instead:
0x012A, 0x012B or 0x012F.

0x0118

Invalid or
Inconsistent
Configuration
Application Path

This error is returned from the Target device when
the Connection Point parameter specified for the
Configuration data is incorrect or not supported. The
Productivity1000 CPU does not return this error and
uses the following error codes instead: 0x0129 or
0x012F.

0x0119

Non-listen Only
Connection Not
Opened

This error code is returned when an Originator device
attempts to establish a listen only connection and
there is no non-listen only connection established.
The Productivity1000 CPU does not support listen only
connections as Scanner or Adapter.

0x01

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

6-57

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 6: Communications
P1000 EtherNet/IP Error Codes

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

General Extended Status
Status Error
Error

Name

Description

0x011A

Target Object Out of
Connections

The maximum number of connections supported by
this instance of the object has been exceeded.

0x01

0x011B

RPI is smaller than
the Production
Inhibit Time

The Target to Originator RPI is smaller than the Target
to Originator Production Inhibit Time. Consult the
manufacturer’s documentation as to the minimum
rate that data can be produced and adjust the RPI to
greater than this value.

0x01

0x011C

Transport Class Not
Supported

The Transport Class requested in the Forward Open is
not supported. Only Class 1 and Class 3 classes are
supported in the Productivity1000 CPU.

0x01

0x011D

Production Trigger
Not Supported

The Production Trigger requested in the Forward Open
is not supported. In Class 1, only Cyclic and Change
of state are supported in the Productivity1000 CPU. In
Class 3, Application object is supported.

0x01

0x011E

Direction Not
Supported

The Direction requested in the Forward Open is not
supported.

0x01

0x011F

Invalid Originator
to Target Network
Connection Fixed/
Variable Flag

The Originator to Target fixed/variable flag specified
in the Forward Open is not supported. Only Fixed is
supported in the Productivity1000 CPU.

0x01

0x0120

Invalid Target to
Originator Network
Connection Fixed/
Variable Flag

The Target to Originator fixed/variable flag specified
in the Forward Open is not supported. Only Fixed is
supported in the Productivity1000 CPU.

0x01

0x0121

Invalid Originator
to Target Network
Connection Priority

The Originator to Target Network Connection Priority
specified in the Forward Open is not supported. Low,
High, Scheduled and Urgent are supported in the
Productivity1000 CPU.

0x01

0x0122

Invalid Target to
Originator Network
Connection Priority

The Target to Originator Network Connection Priority
specified in the Forward Open is not supported. Low,
High, Scheduled and Urgent are supported in the
Productivity1000 CPU.

0x01

0x0123

Invalid Originator
to Target Network
Connection Type

The Originator to Target Network Connection Type
specified in the Forward Open is not supported. Only
Unicast is supported for O -> T (Output) data in the
Productivity1000 CPU.

0x01

0x0124

Invalid Target to
Originator Network
Connection Type

The Target to Originator Network Connection Type
specified in the Forward Open is not supported.
Multicast and Unicast is supported in the
Productivity1000 CPU. Some devices may not support
one or the other so if this error is encountered try the
other method.

0x01

0x0125

Invalid Originator
to Target Network
Connection
Redundant_Owner

The Originator to Target Network Connection
Redundant_Owner flag specified in the Forward Open
is not supported. Only Exclusive owner connections
are supported in the Productivity1000 CPU.

0x0126

This error is returned when the Configuration data sent
in the Forward Open does not match the size specified
or is not supported by the Adapter. The Target device
Invalid Configuration
may return an additional Unsigned Integer 16 value
Size
that specifies the maximum size allowed for this data.
An array can be defined for this field in order to view
the extended error code attributes.

0x01

6-58

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

P1000
Supported

Chapter 6: Communications
P1000 EtherNet/IP Error Codes
General
Extended
Status Error Status Error

Name

Description

0x0127

This error is returned when the Originator to Target (Output
data) size specified in the Forward Open does not match what
is in the Target. Consult the documentation of the Adapter
device to verify the required size. Note that if the Run/Idle
header is requested, it will add 4 additional bytes and must
be accounted for in the Forward Open calculation. The
Productivity1000 CPU always requires the Run/Idle header
so if the option doesn’t exist in the Scanner device, you
Invalid Originator to must add an additional 4 bytes to the O -> T (Output) setup.
Target Size
Some devices may publish the size that they are looking for
as an additional attribute (Unsigned Integer 16 value) of the
Extended Error Code. An array can be defined for this field in
order to view the extended error code attributes.
Note: This error may also be generated when a Connection
Point value that is invalid for IO Messaging (but valid for
other cases such as Explicit Messaging) is specified, such as
0. Please verify if the Connection Point value is valid for IO
Messaging in the target device.

0x0128

Invalid Target to
Originator Size

This error is returned when the Target to Originator (Input
data) size specified in the Forward Open does not match
what is in Target. Consult the documentation of the Adapter
device to verify the required size. Note that if the Run/
Idle header is requested, it will add 4 additional bytes and
must be accounted for in the Forward Open calculation. The
Productivity1000 CPU does not support a Run/Idle header for
the T -> O (Input) data. Some devices may publish the size
that they are looking for as an additional attribute (Unsigned
Integer 16 value) of the Extended Error Code. An array can be
defined for this field in order to view the extended error code
attributes.
Note: This error may also be generated when a Connection
Point value that is invalid for IO Messaging (but valid for
other cases such as Explicit Messaging) is specified, such as
0. Please verify if the Connection Point value is valid for IO
Messaging in the target device.

0x01

0x0129

Invalid
Configuration
Application Path

0x01

0x012A

Invalid Consuming
Application Path

0x01

0x012B

Invalid Producing
Application Path

0x01

0x012C

Config. Symbol
Does not Exist

0x01

0x012D

Consuming Symbol The Originator attempted to connect to a consuming tag name
Does not Exist
that is not supported in the Target.

0x01

0x012E

Producing Symbol
Does not Exist

The Originator attempted to connect to a producing tag name
that is not supported in the Target.

0x01

0x012F

Inconsistent
Application Path
Combination

The combination of Configuration, Consuming and Producing
application paths specified are inconsistent.

0x01

P1000
Supported

This error will be returned by the Productivity1000 CPU if a
Configuration Connection with a size other than 0 is sent to
the CPU. The Configuration Connection size must always be
zero if it this path is present in the Forward Open message
coming from the Scanner device.
This error will be returned by the Productivity3000 CPU if the
Consuming (O -> T) Application Path is not present in the
Forward Open message coming from the Scanner device or if
the specified Connection Point is incorrect.
This error will be returned by the Productivity1000 CPU if
the Producing (T -> O) Application Path is not present in the
Forward Open message coming from the Scanner device or if
the specified Connection Point is incorrect.
The Originator attempted to connect to a configuration tag
name that is not supported in the Target.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

6-59

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 6: Communications
P1000 EtherNet/IP Error Codes

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

General Extended Status
Status Error
Error

Name

Description

0x01

0x0130

Inconsistent
Consume data
format

0x01

0x0131

Inconsistent Product Information in the data segment not consistent with
data format
the format of the data in the produced data.

0x01

0x0132

Null Forward
Open function not
supported

0x01

0x0133

Connection Timeout
Multiplier not
acceptable

0x01

0x0203

Connection Timed
Out

0x01

0x0204

Unconnected
Request Timed Out

0x01

0x0205

Parameter Error
in Unconnected
Request Service

This error occurs when Connection Tick Time/
Connection time-out combination is specified in the
Forward Open or Forward Close message this is not
supported by the device.

0x01

0x0206

Message Too
Large for
Unconnected Send
Service

Occurs when Unconnected_Send message is too large
to be sent to the network.

0x01

0x0207

Unconnected
Acknowledge
without Reply

This error occurs if an Acknowledge was received but
no data response occurred. Verify that the message
that was sent is supported by the Target device using
the device manufacturer’s documentation.

0x0301

No Buffer Memory
Available

This error occurs if the Connection memory buffer in
the target device is full. Correct this by reducing the
frequency of the messages being sent to the device
and/or reducing the number of connections to the
device. Consult the manufacturer’s documentation for
other means of correcting this.

0x01

0x0302

Network Bandwidth
not Available for
Data

This error occurs if the Producer device cannot
support the specified RPI rate when the connection
has been configured with schedule priority. Reduce the
RPI rate or consult the manufacturer’s documentation
for other means to correct this.

0x01

0x0303

No Consumed
Connection ID Filter
Available

This error occurs if a Consumer device doesn’t have
an available consumed_connection_id filter.

0x01

0x0304

Not Configured to
Send Scheduled
Priority Data

This error occurs if a device has been configured for
a scheduled priority message and it cannot send the
data at the scheduled time slot.

0x01

6-60

1000

Information in the data segment not consistent with
the format of the data in the consumed data.

The target device does not support the function
requested in the NULL Forward Open request. The
request could be such items as “Ping device”,
“Configure device application”, etc.
The Connection Multiplier specified in the Forward
Open request not acceptable by the Target device
(once multiplied in conjunction with the specified
timeout value). Consult the manufacturer device’s
documentation on what the acceptable timeout and
multiplier are for this device.
This error will be returned by the Productivity1000
CPU if a message is sent to the CPU on a connection
that has already timed out. Connections time out if
no message is sent to the CPU in the time period
specified by the RPI rate X Connection multiplier
specified in the Forward Open message.
This time out occurs when the device sends
an Unconnected Request and no response is
received within the specified time out period. In the
Productivity1000 CPU, this value may be found in
the hardware configuration under the Ethernet port
settings for the P1-540.

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

P1000
Supported

Chapter 6: Communications
P1000 EtherNet/IP Error Codes
General Extended Status
Status Error
Error

Name

Description

0x01

0x0305

Schedule Signature
Mismatch

This error occurs if the schedule priority information
does not match between the Target and the Originator.

0x01

0x0306

Schedule Signature
Validation not
Possible

This error occurs when the schedule priority
information sent to the device is not validated.

0x01

0x0311

Port Not Available

This error occurs when a port number specified
in a port segment is not available. Consult the
documentation of the device to verify the correct port
number.

0x01

0x0312

Link Address Not
Valid

The Link address specified in the port segment is not
correct. Consult the documentation of the device to
verify the correct port number.

0x01

0x0315

Invalid Segment in
Connection Path

This error occurs when the target device cannot
understand the segment type or segment value in the
Connection Path. Consult the documentation of the
device to verify the correct segment type and value. If
a Connection Point greater than 255 is specified this
error could occur.

0x01

0x0316

Forward Close
Service Connection
Path Mismatch

This error occurs when the Connection path in
the Forward Close message does not match the
Connection Path configured in the connection. Contact
Tech Support if this error persists.

0x01

0x0317

Scheduling Not
Specified

This error can occur if the Schedule network segment
or value is invalid.

0x01

0x0318

Link Address to Self
Invalid

If the Link address points back to the originator
device, this error will occur.

0x01

0x0319

This occurs in a redundant system when the
Secondary Resource
secondary connection request is unable to duplicate
Unavailable
the primary connection request.

0x01

0x031A

Rack Connection
Already established

The connection to a module is refused because part or
all of the data requested is already part of an existing
rack connection.

0x01

0x031B

Module Connection
Already established

The connection to a rack is refused because part or
all of the data requested is already part of an existing
module connection.

0x01

0x031C

Miscellaneous

This error is returned when there is no other
applicable code for the error condition. Consult
the manufacturer’s documentation or contact Tech
support if this error persist.

0x031D

Redundant
Connection
Mismatch

This error occurs when these parameters don’t match
when establishing a redundant owner connection: O
-> T RPI, O -> T Connection Parameters, T -> O RPI, T
-> O Connection Parameters and Transport Type and
Trigger.

0x031E

No more User
Configurable Link
Resources Available
in the Producing
Module

This error is returned from the Target device when no
more available Consumer connections available for a
Producer.

0x01

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

P1000
Supported

6-61

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 6: Communications
P1000 EtherNet/IP Error Codes

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

General Extended Status
Status Error
Error

Name

Description

0x01

0x031F

No User
Configurable
Link Consumer
Resources
Configured in the
Producing Module

0x01

0x0800

Network Link Offline

The Link path is invalid or not available.

0x01

0x0810

No Target
Application Data
Available

This error is returned from the Target device when the
application has no valid data to produce.

0x01

0x0811

No Originator
Application Data
Available

This error is returned from the Originator device when
the application has no valid data to produce.

0x01

0x0812

Node Address has
changed since
the Network was
scheduled

This specifies that the router has changed node
addresses since the value configured in the original
connection.

0x01

0x0813

Not Configured for
Off-subnet Multicast

The producer has been requested to support a
Multicast connection for a consumer on a different
subnet and does not support this functionality.

0x01

0x0814

Invalid Produce/
Consume Data
format

Information in the data segment not consistent with
the format of the data in the consumed or produced
data. Errors 0x0130 and 0x0131 are typically used for
this situation in most devices now.

0x02

N/A

Resource
Unavailable for
Unconnected Send

The Target device does not have the resources to
process the Unconnected Send request.

N/A

Path Segment Error
in Unconnected
Send

The Class, Instance or Attribute value specified in the
Unconnected Explicit Message request is incorrect
or not supported in the Target device. Check the
manufacturer’s documentation for the correct codes
to use.

Error in Data
Segment

This error code is returned when an error is
encountered in the Data segment portion of a Forward
Open message. The Extended Status value is the
offset in the Data segment where the error was
encountered.

0x04

This error is returned from the Target device when no
Consumer connections have been configured for a
Producer connection.

0x09

Index to error

0x0C

Optional

Object State Error

This error is returned from the Target device when the
current state of the Object requested does not allow
it to be returned. The current state can be specified in
the Optional Extended Error status field.

0x10

Optional

Device State Error

This error is returned from the Target device when the
current state of the Device requested does not allow
it to be returned. The current state can be specified in
the Optional Extended Error status field.

0x13

N/A

Not Enough Data

Not enough data was supplied in the service request
specified.

0x15

N/A

Too Much Data

Too much data was supplied in the service request
specified.

6-62

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

P1000
Supported

Maintenance and
Troubleshooting

Chapter

In This Chapter...
Hardware Maintenance.............................................................................................. 7–2
Diagnostics .............................................................................................................. 7–3
CPU Functions Indicators........................................................................................... 7–4
PWR Indicator ............................................................................................................ 7–5
RUN Indicator ............................................................................................................ 7–7
CPU Indicator ............................................................................................................. 7–7
Communications Problems........................................................................................ 7–7
I/O Module Troubleshooting..................................................................................... 7–8
Noise Troubleshooting............................................................................................. 7–10
Run Time vs. Stop Mode Transfer Instruction......................................................... 7–11
Forcing I/O Points.................................................................................................... 7–14

Chapter 7: Maintenance and Troubleshooting

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Hardware Maintenance
Standard Maintenance
The Productivity1000 is a low maintenance system requiring only a few periodic checks to help
reduce the risks of problems. Routine maintenance checks should be made regarding two key
items.
• Air quality (cabinet temperature, airflow, etc.)
• CPU battery

Air Quality Maintenance
The quality of the air your system is exposed to can affect system performance. If you have
placed your system in an enclosure, verify that the ambient temperature is not exceeding
the equipment operating specifications. If there are filters in the enclosure, clean or replace
them as necessary to ensure adequate airflow. A good rule of thumb is to check your system
environment every one to two months. Make sure the Productivity1000 is operating within
the system operating specifications.

CPU Battery Replacement
A battery is included with the CPU, but is not installed. The battery can be installed to retain

the Time and
Date along with
any Tagname values that are set up as retentive.
Battery
Installation
Procedure
The battery is not needed for program backup.
Step One:

Step Two:

Open battery compartment
located on the top of the CPU.

Insert battery and
close compartment.

P1-540

Squeeze tabs and
pull battery holder up
to remove battery.

P1-540

Battery (Optional)
Take care to insert
battery behind tab.

D2-BAT-1

Coin type, 3.0 V Lithium
battery, 560mA, battery
number CR2354

Battery (Optional)
D2-BAT-1

7–2

Coin type, 3.0V Lithium battery, 560mA, battery number CR2354

Note: Although not needed for program backup, an uninstalled battery is included with the
P1-540. Install this battery if you want the CPU to retain the Time and Date along with any
1000
Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition
Tagname values that you have set up as retentive.

Chapter 7: Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Diagnostics
Diagnostics
Your Productivity1000 system performs many pre-defined diagnostic routines with every CPU scan.
The diagnostics have been designed to detect various types of failures for the CPU and I/O modules.
There are two primary error classes, critical and non-critical.

Critical Errors
Critical errors are errors the CPU has detected that offer a risk of the system not functioning safely or
properly. If the CPU is in Run Mode when a critical error occurs, the CPU will switch to Stop Mode
(Remember, in Stop Mode all outputs are turned off). If a critical error is detected while the CPU is
in Stop Mode, the CPU will not enter Run Mode until the error has been corrected. Here are some
examples of critical errors:
• Power supply failure
• Parity error or CPU malfunction
• I/O configuration errors
• Certain programming errors.

Non-Critical Errors
Non-critical errors are flagged by the CPU as requiring attention. They can neither cause the CPU
to change from Run Mode to Stop Mode, nor do they prevent the CPU from entering Run Mode.
There are system tags the application program can use to detect if a non-critical error has occurred.
The application program can be used to take the system to an orderly shutdown or to switch the
CPU to Stop Mode if necessary.
Some examples of non-fatal errors are:
• Backup battery voltage low
• All I/O module errors
• Certain programming errors.

Finding Diagnostic Information
The CPU automatically logs critical and non-critical error codes. Logged errors can be found
in the following places marked with a time and date stamp:
• Under the Monitor Debug tool of Productivity Suite in the CPU Error History window. The 20
most recent critical and non-critical errors are listed.

Error Codes
See Appendix B “Productivity1000 Error Codes” for a complete list of error messages sorted
by error types.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

7–3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 7: Maintenance and Troubleshooting

CPU Functions Indicators
The Productivity1000 CPU has indicators on the faceplate to help diagnose problems with
the system. The table below gives a quick reference of potential problems associated with each
status indicator. The pages following the table contain a detailed analysis of each of these
indicator problems.
Indicator Status

Potential Problems
1. System voltage is incorrect.
2. Power supply/CPU is faulty.
3. Other components such as an I/O module has power supply
shorted.
1. CPU programming error
2. Switch in STOP position
CPU Status Indicators
CPU internal
error

PWR (off)

RUN (will not come on)
CPU (blink)

PWR

P1-540

RUN

Green LED is illunimated when power is ON

RUN

Green LED is illuminated when CPU is in RUN mode

CPU

Red LED is illuminated during power ON reset, power down, or
watch-dog time-out

PWR

RUN

USB

PGM

LINK

µSD

CPU Status Indicators

CPU Run/Stop Switch Specifications
RUN position

Executes user program, run-time edits possible

STOP position

Does
not execute user program, normal program load position
PWR

ACT LINK

RS-485

ETHERNET

RS-232

CPU

RTS TX RX

T
+

STOP

RUN

7–4

Green LED is illuminated when power
is on
Green LED is illuminated when CPU is in
RUN mode
Red LED is illuminated during power on
reset, power down, or watch-dog time-out.

LINK
10/100

ACT

CPU
REMOTE I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 7: Maintenance and Troubleshooting

PWR Indicator
There are three general reasons for the CPU power status LED (PWR) to be OFF:
1. Power to the module is incorrect or is not applied.
2. Module power supply is faulty.
3. Other component(s) have the power supply shut down.

Faulty or Incorrect Power Supply
If the voltage to/from the power supply is not correct, the CPU may not operate properly or
may not operate at all. Use the following guidelines to correct the problem.
WARNING: To minimize the risk of electrical shock, always disconnect the system power before
inspecting the physical wiring.

1. First, disconnect the system power and check all incoming wiring for loose connections.
2. If you are using a separate termination panel, check those connections to make sure the wiring is
connected to the proper location.
3. If the connections are acceptable, reconnect the system power and measure the voltage at the
base terminal strip to ensure it is within specification. If the voltage is not correct, shut down
the system and correct the problem.
4. If all wiring is connected correctly and the incoming power is within the specifications required,
the power supply should be replaced.

Faulty CPU
There is no simple test for a faulty CPU other than substituting a known good one to see if
this corrects the problem. If you have experienced major power surges, it is possible the CPU
and power supply have been damaged. If you suspect this is the cause, a line conditioner
should be installed on the incoming line. This will keep damaging voltage spikes from
reaching the CPU.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

7–5

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 7: Maintenance and Troubleshooting

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

PWR Indicator, cont’d
Device or Module Causes the Power Supply to Shutdown
Module:
If the PWR LED is operating normally but the power supply shuts down, check each module
for a possible connector problem as follows:
1. Turn off power to the system.
2. Remove a module from the system.
3. Reapply power to the system.
4. Check for power supply normal operation.
5. Repeat procedure until defective module is found and replaced.
Device:
A 5V charge may be originating from the CPU communications port.
Test as follows:
1. Turn off power to the CPU.
2. Disconnect all external devices (i.e., communication cables) from the CPU.
3. Reapply power.
4. If power supply operates normally then check for a shorted device or shorted cable.

7–6

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 7: Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Run Indicator
If the CPU will not enter the Run mode (the RUN indicator is off), the problem is usually
in the application program, unless the CPU has a critical error. If a critical error has
occurred, the CPU LED should be on. You can use a programming device to determine
the cause of the error.
A complete list of error codes can be found in Appendix B.

CPU Indicator
If the CPU indicator is on, a critical error has occurred in the CPU. Generally, this is not
a programming problem but an actual hardware error. The CPU indicator should blink
briefly and then do an automatic reboot.
If the error clears, you should monitor the system and determine what caused the problem.
You will find this problem is sometimes caused by high frequency electrical noise introduced
into the CPU from an outside source. Check your system grounding and install electrical
noise filters if the grounding is suspected. If power cycling the system does not reset the
error, or if the problem returns, you should replace the CPU.

Communications Problems
If a communication error occurs, the indicator will come on and stay on until a successful
communication has been completed. If you cannot establish communications with the
CPU, check these items:
• The cable is disconnected.
• The cable has a broken wire or has been wired incorrectly.
• The cable is improperly terminated or grounded.
• The device connected is not operating at the correct baud rate.
• The device connected to the port is sending data incorrectly.
• A grounding difference exists between the two devices.
• Electrical noise is causing intermittent errors.
• The CPU has a bad communication port; the CPU should be replaced.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

7–7

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 7: Maintenance and Troubleshooting

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

I/O Module Troubleshooting
Things to Check
If you suspect an I/O error, there are several things that could be causing the problem.
• A blown fuse
• A loose terminal block
• The 24VDC supply has failed
• The module has failed
• The I/O configuration check detects a change in the I/O configuration

Error Codes
See Appendix B for Productivity1000 error code information.
Also, in the Productivity Suite programming software, you can go to:
Tools > CPU Error History, and
Tools > CPU Event History
Next, click on “CPU Error”or “Event History” tab to get an updated list of critical errors,
non-critical errors and event history that should indicate problems or changes to the I/O.
This list will give the “GS” (group, slot numbers).

Some Quick Steps
When troubleshooting the Productivity1000 I/O modules there are a few facts you should be
aware of which may assist you in quickly correcting an I/O problem:
• The output modules cannot detect shorted or open output points. If you suspect one or more
points on a output module to be faulty, you should measure the voltage drop from the common to
the suspect point. Remember, when using a Digital Volt Meter, leakage current from an output
device, such as a triac or a transistor, must be considered. A point which is off may appear to be
ON if no load is connected to the point.
• The I/O point status indicators on the modules are logic side indicators. This means the LED
which indicates the ON or OFF status reflects the status of the point in respect to the CPU. For
an output module, the status indicators could be operating normally, while the actual output device
(transistor, triac etc.) could be damaged. With an input module, if the indicator LED is ON, the
input circuitry should be operating properly. To verify proper functionality, check to see that the
LED goes off when the input signal is removed.
• Leakage current can be a problem when connecting field devices to I/O modules. False input
signals can be generated when the leakage current of an output device is great enough to turn on
the connected input device. To correct this, install a resistor in parallel with the input or output of
the circuit. The value of this resistor will depend on the amount of leakage current and the voltage
applied but usually a 10K to 20K resistor will work. Ensure the wattage rating of the resistor is
correct for your application.
• The easiest method to determine if a module has failed is to replace it if you have a spare. However,
if you suspect another device to have caused the failure in the module, that device may cause the
same failure in the replacement module as well. As a point of caution, you may want to check
devices or power supplies connected to the failed module before replacing it with a spare module.

7–8

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 7: Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Testing Output Points
Output points can be set ON or OFF using the force function to override a point even while
the program is running. However, this is not a recommended method to test the output
points. If you want to do an I/O check independent of the application program, follow the
procedure in the table below:
Step

Action

1.
2.
3.

Use Productivity Suite programming software to communicate online to the CPU.
Change to Program Mode.
Go to the first rung of the ladder.
Insert a rung with an “END” statement. (This will cause program execution to occur only at address
0 and prevent the application program from turning the I/O points on or off).
Change to Run Mode.
Use the programming device to set (turn) on or off the points you wish to test.
When you finish testing I/O points delete the “END” statement at the first rung.

4.
5.
6.
7.

WARNING: Depending on your application, forcing I/O points may cause unpredictable machine
operation that can result in a risk of personal injury or equipment damage. Make sure you have taken
all appropriate safety precautions prior to testing any I/O points.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

7–9

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Chapter 7: Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Noise Troubleshooting

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Electrical Noise Problems
Noise is one of the most difficult problems to diagnose. Electrical noise, whether conducted
or radiated, can enter a system in many different ways. It may be difficult to determine how
the noise is entering the system but the corrective actions for either type of noise problem are
similar.
• Conducted noise is when the electrical interference is introduced into the system by way of an attached
wire, panel connection, etc. It may enter through an I/O module, a power supply connection, the
communication ground connection, or the chassis ground connection.
• Radiated noise is when the electrical interference is introduced into the system without a direct
electrical connection, much in the same manner as radio waves.

Reducing Electrical Noise
While electrical noise cannot be eliminated completely, it can be reduced such that it will not
adversely affect system function. Proper grounding of components and signal wiring along
with proper isolation of voltages can minimize noise in the system.
1. Grounding:
• Most noise problems result from improper grounding of the system. A good earth ground can be the
single most effective way to correct noise problems. If a ground is not available, install a ground rod
as close to the system as possible.
• Ensure all ground wires are single point grounds and are not daisy chained from one device to
another. Ground metal enclosures around the system. A loose wire is no more than a large antenna
waiting to introduce noise into the system; therefore, you should tighten all connections in your
system. Loose ground wires are more susceptible to noise than the other wires in your system.
Review Chapter 5, “Installation and Wiring”, if you have questions regarding how to ground your
system.

2. Isolation:
• Electrical noise can enter the system through the power source for the CPU and I/O. Installing an
isolation transformer for all AC sources can correct this problem.
• DC power sources should be well grounded, good quality power supplies. Switching DC power
supplies commonly generate more noise than linear supplies.
• Separate input wiring from output wiring.
• Never run I/O wiring close to high voltage wiring.

7–10

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 7: Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Run Time vs. Stop Mode Transfer Instruction
Here we describe the actions and differences between Run Time & Stop Mode transfers as
shown in this dialog box.

The above dialog is accessed two ways: (only when CPU is online AND in run mode)
Perform either of the following to transfer project to the CPU:
1. Click on the “To CPU” icon on the Tool Bar, or
2. Click through from the File menu > Transfer Project > To CPU.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

7–11

Chapter 7: Maintenance and Troubleshooting

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Run Time Transfers
Run Time Transfer allows the user to transfer edits to a project in the CPU without stopping
the CPU scan, therefore not stopping the process. Be aware that a Run Time Transfer will
affect the length of your scan time, which should be considered if your process is susceptible
to varying or lengthy scan times. The download time is longer compared to a Stop Mode
transfer.
During a Run Time transfer, the current project file continues running until the entire
project file is transferred to the CPU. Once downloaded, the ladder logic files swap and begin
executing the new file. The Tag Database is shared between the two project files during a Run
Time transfer, therefore current operating values will not be effected.
Because the Tag database is shared, any edits to the Tag database will force a Stop Mode
transfer.

Stop Mode Transfers

Stop Mode Transfers allows the user to transfer any and all ladder, Tag Database and
configuration changes to the CPU.
Because the CPU is in stop mode, the project transfer is much faster than a Run Time Transfer
and also loads all initial values to the tags once the project is switched from Stop to Run.
Following are conditions that will force the user to perform a Stop Mode Transfer:
1. Any changes to the hardware configuration, such as:
A. Adding or removing hardware.
B. Changing the configuration of a piece of hardware.
• Ethernet or serial port configuration.

C. Adding an EhterNet/IP device and any configured changes
2. Adding > 5000 tags of any type (Excluding Strings and Structures).
NOTE: This limit is accumulated between each stop mode transfer.

3. Adding >50,000 characters or changing the length of a String data type Tag.
NOTE: This limit is accumulated between each stop mode transfer.

4. Changes to Data Logger.

7–12

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 7: Maintenance and Troubleshooting
5. Changes to Modbus Server settings under Project Properties.
6. Changes to the buffer size for a FILI instruction.
7. Adding >5,000 elements of a Structures data type to Tag Database.
NOTE: This limit is accumulated between each stop mode transfer.

8. Enabling Bit of Word under Project Properties.
9. Enabling Structures in Project Properties.
10. Enable and Disable of EhterNet/IP Adapter.
As the CPU goes from Stop to Run after a Stop Mode Transfer, tags are initialized as if the
project is being executed for the first time. This includes Retentive Tags. If it’s desirable
that the values of Retentive Tags be retained through a Stop Mode Transfer, there are two
methods available. Both options may be enabled and they can be found under Tools >
Options > Project Transfer
1. Upload current retentive values and copy to initial values. This option works during
program upload. When selected, place the CPU in Stop Mode so Retentive Tag values
are stable, then upload the project. Productivity Suite will copy the current value of
all Retentive Tags to their Initial Values in the Tag Database of the project. Perform
your edits and transfer the project back to the CPU. When the CPU goes back to run,
your Retentive Tags will be initialized with their old values. This is a simple process
and is convenient for quick edits to the program, but the CPU must remain in Stop
Mode while the project is edited to ensure that no retentive values have changed during
editing.

2. Copy current retentive tag values to initial values. This option works during program
download. This process is more involved, but the CPU will use the values from the
project currently running as the initial values of the project being transferred. For more
information refer to the Options topic in the help file.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

7–13

Chapter 7: Maintenance and Troubleshooting

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Forcing I/O Points
Following is a description of the actions, expectations and indications of forcing a value in the
Productivity1000 controller.

Advantages of Forces
Almost all tags can be written to in the software without Forcing. However, if the ladder
logic or an external device (operator interface panel, Modbus device, etc.) is connected to your
controller and writing to those tags, the values you write from a Data View will be over-written.
Conversely, if you write a Forced value, this will not be overwritten or reset until you manually
remove the force or reset by means of a Stop to Run mode transition, a Stop Mode Transfer,
or a controller power cycle.

Enabling Forces
The Productivity1000 CPU is a Tag based controller where forcing a tag begins by identifying
any tag you wish to be “Forceable” within the Tag database.

7–14

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 7: Maintenance and Troubleshooting
There are three columns within the Tag database that affect the forcing of all tags.
1. “Forceable” - Checking the box in this column identifies the corresponding tag as being
able to be forced within the system.
2. “Init Forced” - Checking the box in this column identifies that corresponding tag as
being forced as soon as the project is loaded and the processor is switched to Run mode.
3. “Init Force Value” - The state of the box in this column identifies the initial forced state
of the Boolean tag:
• A check mark in a box equates to a logical “1” or “ON”, and
• An unchecked box equates to a logical ”0” or “OFF”. The value placed in this
field for Integer or Floating point tags will be written into the tag.

Forcing Tags in Your System
All forcing of tags can be accomplished through the Data View window or directly in
the program interface while in “Monitor” mode, as long as the “Forceable” box has been
checked in Tag Database. I/O may also be directly forced in I/O View by clicking on
individual I/O points.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

7–15

Chapter 7: Maintenance and Troubleshooting
From the DataView Window, enter the tags you wish to force, or you can view all forceable
tags from the “Forceable Tags” tab automatically created for you when you enable tags as
forceable in the tag database.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

From either of these windows you have the option to select the check box in the Force column.
When this box is checked and the row is selected (selected rows show high-lighted blue) and
you select the Send Edit(s) button, the current row(s) will be forced.
NOTE: You can select multiple rows by clicking and holding down the left mouse button and dragging up or
down. This selects consecutive rows. If you wish to select various rows, simple hold the “Ctrl” control key
on your keyboard while left mouse clicking the rows.

7–16

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Chapter 7: Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Identifying Forced Values
There are two indications that forces are active on your controller.
1. All active forces will be shown in the Forceable tab of the Data View window as shown in the
previous view.
2. You will also see “CPU Data Forced” in Red in the lower right of the Status bar of your
software interface.

NOTE: Only Forced tags with an initial force value specified in the Tag database will be retained after
a Stop to Run transition, Stop Mode transfer, or a power cycle. All forced values are retained during a
Run Time transfer.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

7–17

Chapter 7: Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Force Value Timing Chart
The chart below illustrates how the states of a discrete output are varied when forces and edits
are applied. The ladder rung at the top of the chart (a) shows the logical arrangement of
Logical Contact1 and discrete Output DO-0.1.3.1.
Under normal operation, Logical Contact1 (b) is driven by a clock pulse. This clock pulse
is then fed to the discrete Output DO-0.1.3.1 (c). Edits written to the contact or the coil
from the Data View window within the software will be written one time and will not be
forced. With the clock pulse driving the contact, any software edits made to this contact will
be allowed but will be overwritten by the logic on the very next scan. Any software edits made
to the output will not be allowed and will not register. Edits can only change the state of the
output if there are no other logistic or outside factors influencing the output.
In order to change the state of Logical Contact1 or discrete Output DO-0.1.3.1 while the
clock pulse is driving it, a force must be introduced. The DO-0.1.3.1 Output Edit line (d)
represents edits sent to the discrete output from the Data View window. The DO-0.1.3.1
Output Force Enabled line (e) shows the point at which the software forces the output edit to
take effect. The dotted lines represent the force being enabled and then disabled by the user.
When the force is enabled, any edits made will register at the output regardless of the state of
Logical Contact1. When the force is disabled, all output edits will be ignored.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
7–18

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

European Union
Directives (CE)

Appendix

In This Appendix...
European Union (EU) Directives.........................................................A-2
Basic EMC Installation Guidelines.......................................................A-5

Appendix A: European Union Directives (CE)

A
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

European Union (EU) Directives
NOTE: The information contained in this section is intended as a guideline and is based on our interpretation
of the various standards and requirements. Since the actual standards are issued by other parties, and in
some cases governmental agencies, the requirements can change over time without advance warning or
notice. Changes or additions to the standards can possibly invalidate any part of the information provided in
this section.

This area of certification and approval is absolutely vital to anyone who wants to do business in
Europe. One of the key tasks that faced the EU member countries and the European Economic
Area (EEA) was the requirement to bring several similar yet distinct standards together into one
common standard for all members. The primary purpose of a single standard was to make it
easier to sell and transport goods between the various countries and to maintain a safe working
and living environment. The Directives that resulted from this merging of standards are now
legal requirements for doing business in Europe. Products that meet these Directives are
required to have a CE mark to signify compliance.

Member Countries
As of January 1, 2015, the members of the EU are Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Croatia, Republic
of Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary,
Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Poland, Portugal, Romania,
Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, and United Kingdom. Iceland, Liechtenstein, and Norway
together with the EU members make up the European Economic Area (EEA) and all are covered
by the Directives.

Applicable Directives
There are several Directives that apply to our products. Directives may be amended, or added,
as required.
• Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive (EMC) — this Directive attempts to ensure that devices,
equipment, and systems have the ability to function satisfactorily in an electromagnetic environment
without introducing intolerable electromagnetic disturbance to anything in that environment.
• Machinery Safety Directive — this Directive covers the safety aspects of the equipment, installation,
etc. There are several areas involved, including testing standards covering both electrical noise
immunity and noise generation.
• Low Voltage Directive — this Directive is also safety related and covers electrical equipment that has
voltage ranges of 50–1000 VAC and/or 75–1500 VDC.
• Battery Directive — this Directive covers the production, recycling, and disposal of batteries.

Compliance
NOTE: As of July 22, 2017 ROHS has been added as an additional requirement for CE Compliance per Directive
2011/65/EU. All products bearing the CE mark must be ROHS compliant.

Certain standards within each Directive already require mandatory compliance. The EMC
Directive, which has gained the most attention, became mandatory as of January 1, 1996. The
Low Voltage Directive became mandatory as of January 1, 1997.

A–2

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Appendix A: European Union Directives (CE)
Ultimately, we are all responsible for our various pieces of the puzzle. As manufacturers,
we must test our products and document any test results and/or installation procedures that
are necessary to comply with the Directives. As a machine builder, you are responsible for
installing the products in a manner which will ensure compliance is maintained. You are also
responsible for testing any combinations of products that may (or may not) comply with the
Directives when used together. The end user of the products must comply with any Directives
that may cover maintenance, disposal, etc., of equipment or various components. Although we
strive to provide the best assistance available, it is impossible for us to test all possible configurations of
our products with respect to any specific Directive. Because of this, it is ultimately your responsibility
to ensure that your machinery (as a whole) complies with these Directives and to keep up with
applicable Directives and/or practices that are required for compliance.
This then is the product specific standard for CPUs and covers the low voltage and EMC
directives as required for European CE certification. This standard has many tests together
with test procedures and limits, but also references the below standards for some tests.
IEC 60068
2-1:1990 part
2 Test A
2-2:1974 part
2 Test B

IEC
60417
All Parts

IEC
60664

IEC
60695

IEC
60707

IEC
60947

IEC
60950

IEC
61000

IEC
61010

1:1992
Part 1

2-1 (all
sheets)
Part 2

:1999

5-1:1997
Part 5-1

1:2001
Part 1

4-2:1995
Part 4-2

1:2001
Part 1

7-1:2002
Part 7-1

3:1992

2-6:1995 Part
2: Test Fc

4-3:2002
Part 4-3
4-4:1995

2-6:1995 Part
2: Test Fc

CISPR
11:1999

4-5:1995
Part 4-5

2-14:1984 Part
2 Test N

CISPR
16-1:1999
Part 1

4-6:1996
Part 4-6

2-27:1987 Part
2 Test Ea

CISPR
16-2:1999
Part 2

4-8:1993
Part 4-8
4-12:1995
Part 4-12

2-30:1980 Part
2 Test Db
2-31:1969 Part
Test Ec
2-32:1975 Part
2 Test Ed

For undated references, the latest edition of the referenced
document (including any amendments) applies.

Productivity1000 systems, manufactured by FACTS Engineering, when properly installed
and used, conform to the Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC), Low Voltage Directive, and
Machinery Directive requirements of the following standards:
• Product Specific Standard for Programmable Controllers
EN61131-2:2007 EMC, EN61010-:2010 and EN61010-2-201: 2013 Safety Programmable
controllers, equipment requirements and tests.
• Warning on Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
We recommend that all personnel take necessary precautions to avoid the risk of transferring static
charges to inside the control cabinet, and clear warnings and instructions should be provided on the
cabinet exterior. Such precautions may include the use of earth straps, grounding mats and similar
static-control devices, or the powering off of the equipment inside the enclosure before the door is
opened.
1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

A–3

A
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Appendix A: European Union Directives (CE)

A
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

• Warning on Radio Interference (RFI)
This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio
interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.

General Safety
• External switches, circuit breaker or external fusing, are required for these devices.
• The switch or circuit breaker should be mounted near the programmable controller equipment.

Special Installation Manual
The installation requirements to comply with the requirements of the Machinery Directive,
EMC Directive and Low Voltage Directive are slightly more complex than the normal
installation requirements found in the United States. To help with this, we have published a
special manual which you can order or download from our website:
• DA–EU–M – EU Installation Manual that covers special installation requirements to meet the EU
Directive requirements. Refer to this manual for updated information.

Other Sources of Information
Although the EMC Directive gets the most attention, other basic Directives, such as the
Machinery Directive and the Low Voltage Directive, also place restrictions on the control
panel builder. Because of these additional requirements it is recommended that the following
publications be purchased and used as guidelines:
• BSI publication BS TH 42073: November 2000 – covers the safety and electrical aspects of the
Machinery Directive
• EN 60204–1:2006 – Safety of Machinery; General electrical requirements for machinery, including
Low Voltage and EMC considerations
• IEC 61000–5–2: EMC earthing and cabling requirements
• IEC 61000–5–1: EMC general considerations

It may be possible for you to obtain this information locally; however, the official source of
applicable Directives and related standards is:
Publications Office
2, rue Mercier
2985 Luxembourg
LUXEMBOURG
Quickest contact is via the web at:
http://ec.europa.eu/growth/single-market/european-standards/harmonised-standards.
Another source is the British Standards Institution at:
British Standards Institution – Sales Department, Linford Wood:
Milton Keynes, MK14 6LE, United Kingdom.
The quickest contact is via the web at www.bsigroup.com

A–4

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Appendix A: European Union Directives (CE)

Basic EMC Installation Guidelines
Enclosures
The simplest way to meet the safety requirements of the Machinery and Low Voltage Directives
is to house all control equipment in an industry standard lockable steel enclosure. This
normally has an added benefit because it will also help to reduce EMC emissions. Although
the RF emissions from the programmable controller equipment, when measured in the open
air, are well below the EMC Directive limits, certain configurations can increase emission
levels. Holes in the enclosure, for the passage of cables or to mount operator interfaces, can
increase emissions.

Mains Filters
Productivity1000 AC powered power supplies do not require extra mains filtering to comply
with the EMC Directive on conducted RF emissions.

Suppression and Fusing
In order to comply with the fire risk requirements of the Low Voltage and Machinery Directive
standards EN 61010–1 and EN 60204–1, it is necessary to fuse both sides of the power inputs
(on both AC and DC units).
Transient suppressors must be protected by fuses and the capacity of the transient suppressor
must be greater than the blow characteristics of the fuses or circuit breakers to avoid a fire risk.
A recommended AC supply input arrangement for the Productivity1000 is to use twin 3 amp
TT fused terminals with fuse blown indication, such as DINnectors DN–F10L terminals, or
twin circuit breakers.

Internal Enclosure Grounding
A heavy-duty star earth terminal block should be provided in every cubicle for the connection
of all earth ground straps, protective earth ground connections, mains filter earth ground wires,
and mechanical assembly earth ground connections. This should be installed to comply with
safety and EMC requirements, local standards, and the requirements found in IEC 61000–5–
2. The Machinery Directive also requires that the common terminals of the programmable
controller input modules, and common supply side of loads driven from programmable
controller output modules should be connected to the protective earth ground terminal.

Equipotential Grounding
Adequate site earth grounding must be provided for equipment containing modern electronic
circuitry. The use of isolated earth electrodes for electronic systems is forbidden in some
countries. Make sure you check any requirements for your particular destination. IEC 61000–
5–2 covers equipotential bonding of earth grids adequately, but special attention should be
given to apparatus and control cubicles that contain I/O devices, remote I/O racks, or have
inter-system communications with the primary CPU system enclosure.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

A–5

A
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Appendix A: European Union Directives (CE)

A
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Key

Serial Communication Cable
Equipotential Bond

An equipotential bond wire must be provided alongside all serial communications cables, and
to any separate items of the plant which contain I/O devices connected to the programmable
controller. The diagram shows an example of four physical locations connected by a
communications cable.

Communications and Shielded Cables
Screened
Cable

Conductive
Adapter
Serial
I/O

To Earth
Block
Equi-potential
Bond
Control Cubicle

Good quality 24 AWG minimum twisted-pair shielded cables, with overall foil and braid
shields are recommended for analog cabling and communications cabling outside of the
programmable controller enclosure. To date it has been a common practice to only provide
an earth ground for one end of the cable shield in order to minimize the risk of noise caused
by earth ground loop currents between apparatus. The procedure of only grounding one end,
which primarily originated as a result of trying to reduce hum in audio systems, is no longer
applicable to the complex industrial environment. Shielded cables are also efficient emitters of
RF noise from the CPU system, and can interact in a parasitic manner in networks and between
multiple sources of interference.
The recommendation is to use shielded cables as electrostatic “pipes” between apparatus and
systems, and to run heavy gauge equipotential bond wires alongside all shielded cables. When
a shielded cable runs through the metallic wall of an enclosure or machine, it is recommended
in IEC 61000–5–2 that the shield should be connected over its full perimeter to the wall,
preferably using a conducting adapter, and not via a pigtail wire connection to an earth ground
bolt. Shields must be connected to every enclosure wall or machine cover that they pass through.

A–6

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Appendix A: European Union Directives (CE)

Analog and RS232 Cables
Providing an earth ground for both ends of the shield for analog circuits provides the perfect
electrical environment for the twisted pair cable as the loop consists of signal and return, in a
perfectly balanced circuit arrangement, with connection to the common of the input circuitry
made at the module terminals. RS232 cables are handled in the same way.

Multidrop Cables
RS422 twin twisted pair, and RS485 single twisted pair cables also require a 0V link, which
has often been provided in the past by the cable shield. It is now recommended that you use
triple twisted pair cabling for RS422 links, and twin twisted pair cable for RS485 links. This is
because the extra pair can be used as the 0V inter-system link. With loop DC power supplies
earth grounded in both systems, earth loops are created in this manner via the inter-system 0v
link. The installation guides encourage earth loops, which are maintained at a low impedance
by using heavy equipotential bond wires. To account for non–European installations using
single-end earth grounds, and sites with far from ideal earth ground characteristics, we
recommend the addition of 100 ohm rated resistors at each 0V link connection in network and
communications cables.
Last Slave

TXD 0V RXD
+ –
+ –

Slave n

Master

TXD 0V RXD
+ –
+ –

RXD 0V TXD
+ –
+ –

100

100
Termination

Termination

Shielded Cables Within Enclosures
When you run cables between programmable controller items within an enclosure which also
contains susceptible electronic equipment from other manufacturers, remember that these
cables may be a source of RF emissions. There are ways to minimize this risk. Standard data
cables connecting CPUs and/or operator interfaces should be routed well away from other
equipment and their associated cabling. You can make special serial cables where the cable
shield is connected to the enclosure’s earth ground at both ends, the same way as external cables
are connected.

Analog Modules and RF Interference
The readings from all analog modules will be affected by the use of devices that exhibit high
field strengths, such as mobile phones and motor drives.
All AutomationDirect products are tested to withstand field strength levels up to 10V/m,
which is the maximum required by the relevant EU standards. While all products pass this
test, analog modules will typically exhibit deviations of their readings. This is quite normal,
however, systems designers should be aware of this and plan accordingly.
When assembling a control system using analog modules, these issues must be adhered to and
should be integrated into the system design. This is the responsibility of the system builder/
commissioner.
1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

A–7

A
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Appendix A: European Union Directives (CE)

Network Isolation
For safety reasons, it is a specific requirement of the Machinery Directive that a keyswitch
must be provided that isolates any network input signal during maintenance, so that remote
commands cannot be received that could result in the operation of the machinery. To avoid
the introduction of noise into the system, any keyswitch assembly should be housed in its own
earth grounded steel box and the integrity of the shielded cable must be maintained.
Again, for further information on EU directives we recommend that you get a copy of our EU
Installation Manual (DA–EU–M) online. Also, you can check the EU Commission’s official
web site at:
http://publications.europa.eu.
It is good Engineering practice to install toroid inductors on the I/O wiring and the
communications cables such as listed in the table below.

A
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Toroid Inductors
Manufacturer
RS Online
Fair-Rite
Wurth Elektronick

Mfg. Part Number Outside Diameter

Inside Diameter

Length

2606795

17.5 mm

9.5 mm

28.5 mm

2643665702

17.45 mm

9.5 mm

28.6 mm

7427009

17.5 mm

9.5 mm

28.5 mm

Mains Fuse/
Isolation Transformer

Lockout switch for
communication

Toroid and
conduit for
communication
cable

2" (50mm)
minimum
clearance
all sides

Pressure-sensitive
switch for power

A–8

1000

Separate conduit
and toroid coils
for DC signals,
AC signals, and
analog signals

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Appendix A: European Union Directives (CE)

Items Specific to the Productivity1000
• The rating between all circuits in this product are rated as basic insulation only, as appropriate for
single fault conditions.
• It is the responsibility of the system designer to earth one side of all control and power circuits, and
to earth the braid of screened cables.
• This equipment must be properly installed while adhering to the guidelines of the in house CPU
installation manual DA–EU–M, and the installation standards IEC 61000–5–1, IEC 61000–5–2
and IEC 61131–4.
• It is a requirement that all CPU equipment must be housed in a protective steel enclosure,
which limits access to operators by a lock and power breaker. If access is required by operators
or untrained personnel, the equipment must be installed inside an internal cover or secondary
enclosure.
• It should be noted that the safety requirements of the machinery directive standard EN60204–1
state that all equipment power circuits must be wired through isolation transformers or isolating
power supplies, and that one side of all AC or DC control circuits must be earthed.
• Both power input connections to the programmable controller must be separately fused using 3
amp T-type anti–surge fuses, and a transient suppressor fitted to limit supply overvoltages.
• If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by
the equipment may be impaired.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

A–9

A
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Appendix A: European Union Directives (CE)

Notes

A
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
A–10

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Productivity1000
Error Codes

Appendix

In This Appendix:
Productivity1000 Error Codes............................................................... B–1
Communications Error Codes.................................................................................... B–2
Module Error Codes.................................................................................................. B–3
CPU Error Codes....................................................................................................... B–4
Project Error Codes.................................................................................................... B–5
Project Error Messages.............................................................................................. B–7

Appendix B: Productivity1000 Error Codes

A
B
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Communications Error Codes
Description

Error Code

Suggested Fix

Function Code not supported

Check instruction or connected device and correct Function
code or address range selected.

Address out of range. This error is typically
generated when a Modbus address has been
requested that does not exist in the CPU.

Check instruction or connected device and correct Function
code or address range selected.

Illegal Data Value. This error is typically generated
Check the Modbus request against the Modbus protocol
when the Modbus request sent to the CPU is formed specification (www.modbus.org) to verify that it was
incorrectly.
formed correctly.

Device Failure

B–2

Check connected device

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Appendix B: Productivity1000 Error Codes

Module Error Codes
Error Code

Cause

Solution

E02101

One or more module status bits are set.

Examine the individual module status bits for the module(s) in
question to determine the cause of the error and appropriate
action.

E02110

Module firmware is incompatible with
project.

Recompile and transfer project to CPU. If problem persists,
upgrade module firmware to latest version, then recompile and
transfer project using latest Programming Software.

E02111

Module firmware is incompatible with
project.

Recompile and transfer project to CPU. If problem persists,
upgrade module firmware to latest version, then recompile and
transfer project using latest Programming Software.

E02112

Module configuration data is invalid.

Recompile and transfer project to CPU. If problem persists,
upgrade module firmware to latest version, then recompile and
transfer project using latest Programming Software.

E02113

Module configuration data is invalid.

Recompile and transfer project to CPU. If problem persists,
upgrade module firmware to latest version, then recompile and
transfer project using latest Programming Software.

E02114

Unable to configure module.

Restart CPU. If problem persists, recompile and transfer project
to CPU. If problem persists, upgrade module firmware to
latest version, then recompile and transfer project using latest
Programming Software.

E02115

Unable to configure module.

E02210

Too many modules G000

P1 CPU only supports 8 modules at a time. Remove power and
remove all modules past the 8th module.

E02301

Expected module is not installed, or the
installed module is defective.

Install the correct module.

E02302

Expected module is not installed, or the
installed module is defective.

Install the correct module.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

B–3

A
B
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Appendix B: Productivity1000 Error Codes

CPU Error Codes

A
B
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Error Code

Cause

Solution

E05101

The CPU battery is low.

Replace CPU’s Battery.

E05106

I2C bus has locked up.

Self-recoverable. If problem persists, restart system.

E05120

The module specified has a Firmware Error.

E05121

The module specified has a Hardware Error.

E05122

The module specified has an Internal Error.

Replace the unit. If unit is in warranty, call AutomationDirect for
an RA number.
Replace the unit. If unit is in warranty, call AutomationDirect for
an RA number.
Replace the unit. If unit is in warranty, call AutomationDirect for
an RA number.

B–4

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Appendix B: Productivity1000 Error Codes

Project Error Codes
Error Code

Cause

Solution
Power cycle CPU. If problem persists, contact AutomationDirect
for repair or replacement.

E03000 - E03199

Internal firmware file system error.

E03201 - E03299

cycle CPU. If problem persists, contact AutomationDirect
Internal firmware operating system error. Power
for repair or replacement.
Unable to exit RUN mode.

Power cycle CPU. If problem persists, contact AutomationDirect
for repair or replacement.

Internal firmware USB error.

Problem should self recover. If problem persists, power cycle
CPU.

A scan exceeded the timeout specified in
CPU Hardware Configuration.
Scan attempted access beyond array
limits. Txxxx is task ID. Rxxxx is rung
number.

Verify that For/Next loops are handled properly. Adjust the
timeout setting.

E04201

Internal firmware Data Logging error.

Problem should self recover. If problem persists, power cycle
CPU.

E04202

Cannot create data logging folder.

Ensure a supported storage device is properly installed in USB
OUT port on CPU. If problem persists, restart system.

E04203

Cannot write data to data logging storage Ensure a supported storage device is properly installed in USB
OUT port on CPU. If problem persists, restart system.
device.

E03301
E03801 - E03899
E03901
E04101

Correct problem in ladder logic or data that caused invalid
access.

Internal firmware Data Logging buffer is
greater than 50% full.
Internal firmware Data Logging buffer
overflow.
Invalid system ID found while loading
project.

Problem should self recover. If problem persists, power cycle
CPU.
Problem should self recover. If problem persists, power cycle
CPU.

E04220

Email instruction failed.

Problem should self recover. If problem persists, power cycle
CPU.

E04300 - E04302

A project file is missing.

Load new project.

E04303

Internal firmware project loader failure.

E04304

Project load failure limit exceeded.
Project has been removed.

Problem should self recover. If problem persists, power cycle
CPU.

E04204
E04205
E04210

E04305 - E04306
E04307
E04308 - E04315

Load new project.

Internal firmware project loader failure.

Problem should self recover. If problem persists, power cycle
CPU. If problem persists, load new project.

Project file corrupt.

Load new project.

Internal firmware project loader failure.

Load new project.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

B–5

A
B
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Appendix B: Productivity1000 Error Codes

Project Error Codes - Continued

A
B
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Error Code

Cause

Solution

E04316

Project upload failed.

Retry the process.

E04317

Internal firmware project loader failure.,

Load new project.

E04318

Modbus TCP connection limit exceeded.

Reduce the number of concurrently enabled MRX, MWX, RX
and WX Instructions to no more than 64.

E04319

Internal error.

Self-recoverable, if problem persists restart CPU.

E04320

One or more RS232 parameters contain invalid Verify that all RS232 parameters in project contain valid settings.
values.

E04321

One or more RS485 parameters contain invalid Verify that all RS485 parameters in project contain valid settings.
values.

B–6

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Appendix B: Productivity1000 Error Codes

Project Error Messages
Error Message

Cause

Solution

Cannot create a task with the name
‘’ because a task with that The name of the new task already exists.
name already exists.

Create a unique task name.

The help file ‘’
cannot be found.

The help file cannot be found in the
location that it was installed.

Re-install the software. The
ProductivitySuite Help file: P3-HELP.chm
should be located in the following folder:
C:\ProgramFiles\AutomationDirect\
ProductivitySuite x.x.x.x\data\help

The topic ‘’ does not
exist.
Task name cannot be empty.

A referenced help topic has either been
the software or download the
changed, moved, or deleted from the help Re-install
Latest Help File version.
file.
An attempt was made to create a task
Create a unique task name.
without a task name.

The task name has an invalid
character ‘’.

An attempt was made to create a task with Create a unique task name using valid
an invalid character in the name.
characters only.

The task name ‘’ already
exists.

The name of the new task already exists.

Tagname cannot be all digits.

A tagname that consists of only digits was There must be at least one letter in a
entered.
tagname.

Cannot complete the operation
because the P1-540 folder already
exists.

The P1-540 folder already exists on the
the create folder option in the
target removable USB drive and the create Uncheck
dialog and try transfer again.
folder option is checked.

Cannot complete the operation
because the P1-540 folder does not
exist.

The P1-540 folder does not exist on the
the create folder option in the dialog
target removable USB drive and the create Check
and try transfer again.
option is not checked.

Create a unique task name.

Cannot complete the operation due to System could not create the P1-540 folder. This might be due to a read only drive.
failure to create the P1-540 folder.
Failed to reboot CPU.
Failed to get CPU date & time from
CPU.
Failed to set CPU date & time.
CPU does not exist.
Rebooting the CPU failed.
The IP address
‘’ is already on the
network. Please use a different
address.
Cannot change CPU name.

CPU failed to reboot.

Reboot CPU again or cycle power.

CPU failed to return date & time data.

Check CPU to PC connection.

CPU failed to set date & time.

Check CPU to PC connection.

Add a CPU to the hardware configuration
connect to the CPU and select
A CPU does not exist in the configuration. or
“read configuration” in the Hardware
Configuration dialog.
CPU failed to reboot.

Reboot CPU again or Cycle power

The new CPU IP address is used by
another entity on the network.

Select a unique IP address. You may need
to contact your networks IT department
to verify.

Failed to change CPU name due to a CPU
error or a network problem

Check CPU to PC connection.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

B–7

A
B
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Appendix B: Productivity1000 Error Codes

A
B
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Project Error Messages - Continued
Error Message

Cause

Solution

Cannot change IP configuration due
to CPU error.

CPU failed to change IP configuration.

Check CPU to PC connection and network
configuration. Connections through a
router may also cause conflicts.

Cannot change IP configuration due
to network problem.

CPU failed to respond to the IP
configuration request.

Check CPU to PC connection and network
configuration. Connections through a
router may also case conflicts.

Could not connect to the CPU.

CPU is not able to be connected.

Check CPU to PC connection.

Could not disconnect the CPU.
Could not connect to the selected
CPU.

CPU is not able to be disconnected.

Check CPU to PC connection.

Failed to validate security on connection.

Check CPU to PC connection and required
security passwords.

Cannot blink CPU due to CPU error.

CPU failed to blink CPU run light.

Check CPU to PC connection and clear
existing CPU errors.

Cannot blink CPU due to network
problem.

Check CPU to PC connection and network
CPU failed to respond to the blink request. configuration. Connections through a
router may also cause conflicts.

Failed to retrieve I/O inventory from
CPU ‘’.

CPU failed to respond to the inventory
request.

Check CPU to PC connection and request
again.

Failed to put the CPU to run mode.

CPU is not able to be put in run mode.

CPU mode switch must be in the Run
position and errors cleared.

Failed to put the CPU to stop mode.

CPU is not able to be put in stop mode.

Check CPU to PC connection.

Failed to put the CPU to debug mode. CPU is not able to be put in debug mode.

Check CPU to PC connection. CPU must be
in STOP before entering debug mode.

CPU has existing connection.

CPU cannot be connected since it has
already connected to another software.

Verify existing connections.

Failed to put the CPU into mode because CPU
connection is lost.

CPU connection is lost while setting CPU
mode.

Check CPU to PC connection.

B–8

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Appendix B: Productivity1000 Error Codes

Project Error Messages - Continued
Error Message
Failed to put the CPU into mode because CPU has
existing critical error.

Cause

Solution

Cannot set CPU mode due to critical errors Check CPU to PC connection and clear
on the CPU.
errors.

Failed to put the CPU into run mode
set CPU to run mode since the run/ Place the CPU switch in Run.
because the CPU switch is set to the Cannot
stop switch is in the stop position.
STOP position.
Could not connect to the detected
CPU.

An unknown failure occurred on
connection.

Check CPU to PC connection.

You do not have permission to access The security setup does not allow the current Check CPU to PC connection and required
user to perform this operation.
security passwords.
this feature.
You need to specify a user name.
You need to specify a password.
The two passwords do not match.
At least one user needs to have
“Project Transfer From CPU and
Monitor Data” selected to enable the
protection feature.
At least one user needs to have
“Project Transfer To CPU” selected
to enable the protection feature.
You must connect to a CPU first.

The name on a user account was deleted
while editing the profile.
The password on a user account was
deleted while editing the profile.
The password on a user account was
changed and the verification does not
match the new value.

Specify the user name.

Project Transfer from CPU and Data
Monitor security was enabled without a
user with these rights currently defined.

Define at least one user with the
appropriate project transfer rights.

Project Transfer to CPU security was
enabled without a user with these rights
currently defined.

Define at least one user with the
appropriate project transfer rights.

User tried to Set Factory Defaults, Reboot
the CPU, Read the SRAM, or Clear CPU
Memory without first being connected to
the CPU.

Check CPU to PC connection.

The current project does not contain
The user tried to download a project that
a CPU in the configuration. Go to:
does not contain a CPU to the CPU or USB
Setup>Hardware Config to correct the Pen Drive.
problem.

Specify the password.
Re-enter the password and check to make
sure both are the same.

Add a CPU to the hardware configuration
or connect to the CPU and in the hardware
configurations dialog select “read
configuration”.

The CPU firmware is in service
mode. The requested action is not
available in this mode.

The user tried to transfer a project to a CPU Check CPU to PC connection and upgrade
that is in Service Mode.
firmware.

Please select a search result first.

In the Find dialog, User pressed the GoTo
button before selecting an entry in the
Search Results list.

Define your search criteria and try again.

Incorrect Key Code.

User entered an invalid license keycode.

Verify correct key code was entered.
Pay close attention to capitalization, and
mixture of letters and numbers.

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

B–9

A
B
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Appendix B: Productivity1000 Error Codes

NOTES:

A
B
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
B–10

1000

Hardware User Manual, 1st Edition

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : No
Create Date                     : 2017:10:25 14:54:55-04:00
Creator                         : Adobe InDesign CC 2017 (Windows)
Modify Date                     : 2017:12:18 08:52:20-05:00
Title                           : 
Trapped                         : False
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c006 80.159825, 2016/09/16-03:31:08
Metadata Date                   : 2017:12:18 08:52:20-05:00
Creator Tool                    : Adobe InDesign CC 2017 (Windows)
Format                          : application/pdf
Document ID                     : uuid:7918acd3-d3fd-4a9e-b615-528c8684b52b
Instance ID                     : uuid:6b227a6b-40bc-4e81-af17-427f39b19751
Producer                        : Adobe PDF Library 15.0
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 252

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

View / The Manual P1userm

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation